The URL can be used to link to this page

Report (573) 0o �j� ;1.° 01 F EB 2 0� �- of �� SAS o �1\ Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Pfaffle Street Tigard, Oregon Owner: Cedar Hills Investment, Inc. 915 NW Torrey View LN Portland, OR 97229 I I I Mildren Design Group, P.C. 7650 SW Beveland Street, Suite 120 Tigard, Oregon 97223 (503244 -0552 December 13, 2007 Project Number 106244 I I I I I I Owner Cedar Hills Development 915 NW Torreyview Lane I Portland, Oregon 97229 a Architect Mildren Design Group, P.C. C S V ' / � Contact: Gene Mildren ,i � 7650 SW Beveland Street 30 ■ rri la Suite 120 • r , �� .I Tigard, Oregon 97223 $ ,_ b m a (503) 244 -0552 GON 4* OF e g I 9 P F Geotechnical Engineer Rapid Soils Solutions, Inc. ' NGINE Prepared Specification Sections: Contact: Mia Mahedy- Sexton �, 4. 19244 q I 02100, 02200, 02240, 02741 3915 SW Plum St. ,-- — 02831, Appendix Portland, Oregon 97219 (503) 816 -3689 OREGON A. 11 %1 H ED'i S ,,� ~ O I `EXPIRES f z.-3/ — 6 r 1 I 1S TE Landscape Architect Clifford Design � � � Prepared Specification Sections: Contact: John Clifford �- 12 02819, 02900, 02920 17870 SW Mandel Lane o ; 02923, 02930, 02950, 02970 Sherwood, Oregon 97140 �� ,, - (503) 925 -0256 C'� F. C �� % ' C.) - OREGON • • 1 1/3cY08 S . I gi I Civil Engineer AAI Engineering Prepared Specification Sections: Contact: Craig Harris 00 PROp. I 02660, 02720, 02730 4875 SW Griffith Drive ��c�'� 1 G1 N 'Y Suite 300 / . ,4 Oregon 97005 4 Beaverton, Or g i 1 (503) 620 -3030 • , ' ON . G N. VO` U I EXPIRES: 6/3001 I I . �o PROF Structural Engineer AAI Engineering ,`c -4,/ . I M Ei� Prepared Specification Sections: Contact: Steve Young ' G r 03100, 03200, 03300, 03411, 4875 SW Griffith Drive t ' . 03600, 05120, 05210, 05310, Suite 300 r ",kti (,� _o 05500, 06100, 06115, 06150, Tigard, Oregon 97223 o ff! 06193 (503) 443 -3900 ` s s - a ''N A. 4 C�` 1E(PIf es:,,61 2 4 till j I • I 1 I .i i 1 1 1 • I 1 i 1 I SPECIFICATION INDEX I DIVISION 1- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I 01010 Summary of Work 01010 -1 -2 01019 Contract Considerations 01019 -1 -3 01039 Coordination and Meetings 01039 -1 -5 01100 Supplementary General Conditions 01100 -1 -6 01240 Contractors RFI 01240 -1 -3 I 01300 Submittals 01300 -1 -7 01400 Quality Control 01400 -1 -3 01410 Testing and Laboratory Services 01410 -1-6 I 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls 01500 -1-4 01600 Materials and Equipment 01600 -1 -3 01630 Product Options and Substitutions 01630 -1 -2 I 01700 Contract Closeout 01700 -1-4 01710 Cleaning 01710 -1 -2 01730 Operation and Maintenance 01730 -1-4 I DIVISION 2 -SITE WORK 1 02100 Site Preparation - 02100 -1 -2 02200 Earthwork 02200 -1 -6 I 02240 Cement Treated Sub Grade 02240 -1 -3 02660 Water Distribution 02660 -1-6 02720 Storm Sewerage Systems 02720 -1-4 I 02730 Sanitary Sewer Systems 02730 -1 -3 02741 Asphalt Concrete Pavement 02741 -1 -2 02765 Pavement Markings 02765 -1 -3 02774 Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks 02774 -1 -8 02810 Irrigation 02810 -1 -3 02830 Segmented Retaining Wall 02830 -1 -9 I 02900 - Landscape 02900 -1-4 I DIVISION 3- CONCRETE 03100 Concrete Formwork 03100 -1 -5 03200 Concrete Reinforcement 03200 -1 -3 03300 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03300 -1 -9 03310 Underslab Vapor Barrier 03310 -1 -3 I 03600 Grout 03600 -1 -3 I I I DIVISION 4- MASONRY 04210 Clay Unit Masonry 04210 -1 -8 1 DIVISION 5- METALS 05120 Structural Steel 05120 -1-6 DIVISION 6 -WOOD AND PLASTICS I 06100 Wood Framing 06100 -1 -5 1 06115 Sheathing 06115 -1 -2 06150 Wood Chord Joists 06150 -1 -3 06193 Glue Laminated Structural Units 06193 -1 -3 I DIVISION 7- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07100 Waterproofing 07100 -1 -7 07180 Water Repellants 07180 -1-4 07210 Building Insulation 07210 -1 -3 1 07510 Built Up Bituminous Roofing 07510 -1 -5 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07600 -1-6 I 07900 Joint Sealants 07900 -1 -6 DIVISION 8 -DOORS AND WINDOWS ill 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08410 -1 -11 08800 Glazing 08800 -1 -7 DIVISION 9- FINISHES 1 09900 Painting 09900 -1 -9 09941 Exterior Painting Schedule 09941 -1 -1 1 DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES 10523 Fire Extinguishers 10523 -1 -2 1 10950 Miscellaneous Specialties 10950 -1 -2 1 APPENDIX Report of Geotechnical Engineering Services prepared by Rapid Soil Solutions. I 1 I I 1 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Project Description 2. Work by Owner 3. Work Not Included in Contract, (NIC) 4. Contractor Use of Site. 1.2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION • A. Work for the Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center consists of three buildings totaling approximately 15,150 sq. ft. single story buildings with concrete slab on grade floor, wood framed with brick veneer walls, and a wood panelized roof system, varying in clear height. B. Site Work consists of parking and amenities for cars, maneuvering, asphaltic concrete paving, landscape, landscape irrigation and installation of storm, water, and sanitary waste utilities. C. General Conditions: 1. The American Institute of Architects Standard form of General Conditions of the Contract, A.I.A. Document A201, 2007, shall form a part of these Specifications with the same force and effect as if bound herein. A copy of these General Conditions is available at the office of the Architect. 2. The Contractor is hereby directed to obtain copies of Document A201 to acquaint them with the articles contained therein and to notify and appraise all Subcontractors, suppliers, and other parties to the Contract as to its contents. 3. No contractual adjustments shall be due as a result of failure on the part of the Contractor to fully acquaint himself and all other parties to the Contract with the conditions of Document A201. 1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN CONTRACT (NIC) A. NIC Procedures: 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01010 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Summary of Work 1 Project Number 106244 Page 1 I I 1. Items noted "NIC" (Not in Contract) will be furnished and installed - by Owner. 2. Owner will perform NIC work to comply with required construction schedule. I B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product p s g,p tdata, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, inspections, and service. 6. Coordinate execution of Work Item with Contractor. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 1. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. I 3. Protect products from exposure to weather. 4. Cooperate with Owner's subcontractor to ensure complete and timely installation of Work Items. 1.4 USE OF SITE A. Contractor to Use of Site: Contractor shall have complete and exclusive use of the premises for the execution of the work. "SECTION END" I I.. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 01010 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Summary of Work Project Number 106244 Page 2 I 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application for Payment 2. Change Procedures. 3. Alternates. 1.2 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Payment Procedures: 1 1. Submit three copies of each application pplication on AIA form 0702, current edition, Application and Certificate for Payment. 2. Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. 3. Payment Period: First to last day of each month. 4. Submit application for payment on forms required by Owner. 5. Submit Conditional Waiver of Lien and Unconditional Waiver of Lien for each month. 1.3 CHANGE PROCEDURES: I A. Supplemental Instructions: The Architect will advise of minor changes in the work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum /Price of Contract Time as authorized by AIA A201, latest edition, by issuing supplemental instructions 1 on MA Form G710. B. Notice of Change by Architect: 1. The Architect may issue a Proposal Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 2. The Proposal Request is not a change order or a direction to proceed with the work. 3. Prepare a construction cost estimate and respond to Proposal Request within 10 days. 4. After review by Architect and Owner, Proposal Request may or may not be issued as a Change Order. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01019 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Contract Considerations Project Number 106244 Page 1 I I C. Notice of Change by Contractor: I 1. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect of the work. 2. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum /Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect of work by separate or other contractors. 3. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01630, Product Options and Substitutions. 4. Architect will assign a Proposal Request number for documentation purposes. D. Construction Change Directive chve (CCD) 1. Architect may issue a Change Directive signed by the Owner, instructing I the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 2. Document will describe changes in the Work, and designate method of determining any change in Contract Sum /Price or Contract Tirne. 3. Promptly execute the ,change. E. Execution of Change Orders (CO): 1. Execute AIA Document G701, Change Order. 2. Contractor will prepare and Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in Conditions of the Contract. 3. Stipulated Sum Change Order: Based on Proposal Request or Notice of Change and Contractor's price quotation or Contractor's request for a Change Order as approved by Architect. 1 4. Unit Price Change Order: a. For pre - determined unit prices and quantities, the Change Order will be executed on a fixed unit price basis. b. For unit costs or quantities of units of work which are not pre- determined, execute work under a Construction Change 1 Authorization or Construction Change Directive. c. Changes in Contract Sum /Price or Contract Time will be computed as specified for Time and Material Change Order. 5. Time and Material Change Order: a. Submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01019 ,Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contract Considerations Project Number 106244 Page 2 I b. Architect will review and rovide a recommendation to P the Owner for the change allowable in Contract Sum /Price and Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents. c. Maintain detailed records of work done on Time and Material basis. d. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. "SECTION END" I I I I I I I 1 1 I I r Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01019 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contract Considerations Project Number T06244 Page 3 I 1 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Coordination. 2. Field engineering. 3. Cutting and patching. 4. Progress meetings. 1.2 COORDINATION A. General Coordination by Contractor: 1. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various Sections of specifications to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements. 2. Determine the effect of site access requirements and construction activity by Owner's personnel and other contractors employed by the Owner to perform work which is not a part of this contract. 3. Requests for additional compensation to provide site access to other contractors, or for delays caused by other contractors and Owner's personnel will not be considered. 4. Verify and confirm all dimensions and conditions shown or implied on the Drawings and Specifications as well as the physical conditions of the site. 5. Adequately reference and protect all survey monuments on the subject site, or that may be subject to disturbance within the construction area, or the construction of any off -site improvements. If the survey monuments are disturbed, moved, or relocated or destroyed as a result of any construction, the contractor, at their cost, will retain the services of a registered professional land surveyor in the State of Oregon to restore the monument to its original condition and file the necessary surveys as required by Oregon State law. 6. Sidewalks, asphaltic concrete, or utilities which are damaged, deteriorated, or removed by construction shall be replaced to city, county, or state specifications. B. Coordination with Utilities: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � t Section 01039 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Coordination and Meetings Project Number 106244 Page 1 I • 111 1. Verify that utility requirement characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. 2. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. 3. Provide excavation, material, and labor to install gas sleeving as required by NW Natural. • I C. Coordination with Mechanical and Electrical Work: 1. Install additional offsets and bends in them mechanical and electrical systems where required by site conditions. 2. Place runs parallel with line of building. 3. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, • for maintenance and for repairs. 4. Coordinate rough -in, plumbing, and wiring requirements for equipment 1 supplier and connect equipment in accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instructions. I D. Clearances for Equipment and Systems: 1. Provide adequate clearance between architectural, structural, ,plumbing, HVAC, and electrical equipment and systems. 2. Review Drawings for possible conflicts prior to rough -in. 3. Resolve installation conflicts with Architect prior to rough -in. E. Coordination with Finished Work: 1. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction in finished areas, as except as otherwise indicated. 2. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. F. Coordination for Substantial Completion: Coordinate completion and clean up of work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. G. Coordination After Occupancy: After Owner occupancy of P remises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.3 FIELD ENGINEERING: A. Survey: I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01039 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Coordination and Meetings Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 I 1. Employ a Land Surveyor registered in the State of Oregon for site and building layout. 2. Locate and protect survey control and reference points. 3. Control datum is established by Owner provided survey. B. Engineering Services: 1. Provide field engineering services. 2. Establish elevations, lines, and levels, utilizing recognized engineering survey practices. 3. Submit a copy of registered site drawings and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 1.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cuttin g Procedures: 1. Employ original or skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. 2. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: a. Structural integrity of element. b. Integrity of weather - exposed or moisture - resistant elements. c. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of elements. d. Work of Owner or separate contractor. 3. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during cutting the, work to the Architect for decision or remedy. B. Cutting Defective Work: 1. Execute cutting of work required to remove and replace defective work and work not conforming to Contract Documents. 2. Inspect existing conditions of work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting. 3. Provide shoring, bracing, and support as required to maintain structural integrity of the project. 4. Uncover work to install defective work and work installed in incorrect sequence. 5. Excavate and backfill soils where required for cutting. 6. Remove samples of installed work for testing and inspecting. 7. Execute cutting and produce removal by methods which will prevent Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01039 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Coordination and Meetings _ Project Number 106244 Page 3 damage g to other work and will provide proper substrates to receive installation of repairs. C. Correcting Defective Work: 1. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Fit assembly parts together to integrate with other work.' 3. Patch surfaces to comply with specified tolerances and finishes. 4. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, and floor construction. Completely seal voids. 5. Repair surfaces adjacent to cut areas to match the adjacent finish. 6. Refinish exposed finished surfaces to natural breaks in the existing finished surfaces. 1 7. Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. 8. Refinish entire assembly unit. i D. Cutting and Patching for Systems and Equipment: 1. Provide openings in elements of work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work. 2. Do not cut building structural members to install equipment; utility lines, - and sleeves unless approved by the Architect in writing. 3. Fill openings made oversized to install equipment, utility lines, and sleeves until finished surface is tight against the penetrating material allowing for movement of penetrating member. E. Sleeve Fabrication to Penetrate Concrete and Masonry: 1 1. Fabricate sleeve 1 inch in diameter larger than penetrating pipe and pipe insulation. 2. Place steel pipe sleeve in masonry opening and fill around pipe sleeve with mortar. 3. Place steel pipe sleeve in concrete form work and anchor sleeve to prevent movement during placement of concrete. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Meeting Requirements: ' 1. Architect shall schedule and administer meetings every 7 days throughout the progress of the work. - 2. Architect shall confirm dates with parties involved, distribute written Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center • Section 01039 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Coordination and Meetings Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 notice in advance of meeting date, make physical arrangements, p y gements, provide written agenda, preside at meetings, record items discussed and decisions made, and distribute copies of meeting decisions prior to next meeting. 3. Architect shall schedule additional meetings as required by construction activity. B. Attendance Required: 1. Architect and Architect's project consultants affected by agenda. 2. Contractor, job superintendent, and subcontractors affected by agenda. 3. Owner's representative. C. Minimum Agenda: 1. Review minute decisions from revious meetings. gs. 2. Review of work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittal schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. 2 week progress schedule identifying work and responsible party. 9. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 10. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 11. Coordination of projected progress. 12. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 13. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 14. Review Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, Architect's Supplemental Instructions, Contractor issued Request for Information, and proposed changes. 15. Other business relating to the Work. 16. Record list of actions to be performed to resolve conflicts. I "SECTION END" I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01039 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Coordination and Meetings Project Number 106244 Page 5 • 01100 SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Supplementary General Conditions to the General Conditions of The Contract for Construction, A.I.A. Document A201, 2007 edition. PART 2- PRODUCTS (Products not required in this section) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Where any Article ofthe General Conditions is modified Y or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions ' of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph, or Clause shall remain in effect. 3.2 ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS • A. Paragraph 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents: 1. Add the following: "1.2.4 Terms used in the Specifications, such as "approval" or "approved" and "review" or "reviewed" shall be interpreted to mean "written approval" or "stamped review" or equal; approved ,acceptable , "similar toll", "directed ", "required ", "selected ", "ordered ", "reviewed ", or like words shall be interpreted to mean that reference is made to the ruling and judgement of the Architect." B. • Paragraph 1.4 Interpretation: ' 1. Add the following: "1.4.2 These Specifications are of the abbreviated type and include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases, such as "the Contractor shall ", "shall be ", etc., are intentional. Omitted words or phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are when a "note" occurs on the drawings." I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Supplementary General Conditions Project Number 106244 Page 1 i C. Paragraph 1.5 Ownership and Use of p U o Drawings, Specifications and other Instruments of Service: 1. Add the following: "1.5.3 Architect will provide twenty five sets of Contract Documents to the Contractor free of charge for execution of work under this Contract: Additional sets of Contract Documents will be provided at the cost of reproduction." 3.3 CONTRACTOR A. Paragraph 3.7 Permits, Fees and Notices: ' 1. Paragraph 3.7.1: Delete in its entirety and replace with: (a) "3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay for plan check fees and building permit fees, including sewer, gas, and water connection fees, as well as other assessments or fees established by the authority having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall pay for licenses necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, inclusive of mechanical, plumbing, electrical and design built structural systems requiring I separate permit fees." B. Paragraph 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples: 1. Paragraph 3.12.5 (a) Add the following: "Submit all Shop Drawings in the form of four copies of each sheet." 2. Add the following: "3.12.11 Furnish, when requested, samples of equipment proposed or specified for use. Sample submitted shall be the exact sample of the material or product to be incorporated into the Work." 3.4 ARTICLE 4, ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT I A. Paragraph 4.1.2: 1. Delete in its entirety and replace with: (a) "Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner and Architect." B. Paragraph 4.2 Administration of the Contract: I 1. Paragraph 4.2.4, Delete in its entirety and replace with: (a) "Communications Facilitating Contract Administration: Except as otherwise _ Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Supplementary Conditions Project Number 106244 Page 2 • provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall communicate through the Architect. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect:: Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner." 2. Add the following: "Paragraph 4.2.15 : In general, in the event ofconflict between ' Drawings and Specifications, the Specifications take precedence; in conflicts between General Requirements and General Conditions, General Requirements take precedence. In conflicts between large scale drawings and small scale drawings, the large _scale drawings take precedence. Immediately notify Architect ofany error, omission or discrepancy appearing on the Contract Documents. In the 1 event of a conflict or discrepancy on the Drawings or Specifications, the larger quantity and the highest quality shall govern unless approval for the lower quality and the smaller quantity has been given in writing by the Architect." 3.5 ARTICLE 9, PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Paragraph 9.3.3: 1. Add the following: "The Contractor's initial application shall consist solely of the Application and Certificate for Payment with a Owner approved Conditional Lien Release. Subsequent applications shall be accompanied by properly executed Progress Payment Lien, both conditional and unconditional, Releases by all Subcontractors, material suppliers, or, potential lienors. All Progress Payment Releases Unconditional for this project shall be 'consistent in form and wording." B. Paragraph 9.4.2: _ 1. Add the following: "Five percent of the amount of the completed work up to 100 percent completion of the Contract, as shown on approved monthly Application and Certificate for Payment Form, will be retained by the Owner." C. Paragraph 9.6, Progress Payments: • I . 1. : Paragraph 9.6.1, Add the following: "The Owner will make payments on account of the Contract on or about the 15th day of each month, based on the value of ' work estimated by the Contractor.in the schedule of values and approved by the Architect or Owner, to have been completed on or about the last day of each calendar month. Itemized Application. for Payment shall be made in triplicate on • an Application and Certificate for Payment Form. Payment shall be made on • I . estimated quantities of Work, completed and acceptable, properly stored, I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Supplementary.General Conditions - Project Number 106244 Page 3 protected ed and insured. Estimated quantities shall be considered only as approximate and will be subject to Architects or Owners adjustment and correction." 3.5 ARTICLE 10, PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Paragraph 10.3, Hazardous Materials: 1. Add the following: "10.3.7 In the event the Contractor encounters on the site material reasonably believed to be asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or other hazardous and/or toxic substance which has not been rendered harmless, the Contractor shall immediately stop Work in the area affected and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. The Work in the affected area shall not thereafter be resumed except by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor if in fact the material is asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB, or other hazardous and/or toxic substance and has not been rendered harmless. The Work in the affected area shall be resumed in the absence of asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or other hazardous and/or toxic substance, or when it has been rendered harmless, by written agreement of the Owner and Contractor, or in accordance with final determination by the Architect on which arbitration has not been demanded, or by arbitration under Article 4." 2. Add the following: "10.3.8 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Architect, Architect's consultants and agents, and employees of any of them from and against all claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting I from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material is asbestos, polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), or other hazardous and /or toxic substance and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) including loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by negligent acts or omissions of the Owner, anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Owner or anyone for whose acts the Owner may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Subparagraph 10.3.3." 3.6 ARTICLE 11, INSURANCE AND BONDS I A. ' Paragraph 11.1, Contractor's Liability Insurance: Delete in its entirety Y e and replace with: � 1. "11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain with a minimum Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Supplementary General Conditions Project Number 106244 Page 4 I I cancellation of thirty (30) days in a company or companies p Y p acceptable to the Owner and lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the I Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims which may arise out of or result from the Contractor's operations under, the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the 1 . Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. .1, . For the duration of this Contract, Contractor shall maintain Statutory . i Worker's Compensation and shall maintain Employer's Liability Insurance with minimum limits of$2,000,000. Contractor shall require- I Subcontractors to provide Worker's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance with the same minimum limits. .2 For the duration of this Contract, Contractor shall maintain Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, including Contractor's 1 Protective Liability Insurance and Contractual Comprehensive p enswe Operational Insurance , with minimum bodily injury limits of $2,000,000. for each person and $300,000. for each accident. They shall maintain Property Damage Insurance with minimum limits of • $2,000,000. for each accident and $3,000,000. aggregate. .3 For the duration of this contract, Contractor shall maintain Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non- owned, and hired vehicles for bodily injury of $1,000,000. for each I person and $2,000,000. for each accident and property damage minimum limits of $1,000,000. Contractor shall require Subcontractors to provide Comprehensive Automobile Liability I ; Insurance with same minimum limits. .4 Insurance shall cover claims including, but not limited to: claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are I . sustained (1) by a person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to employment of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by I another person; claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because ofinjury to or destruction oftangible property, including loss i . , of use resulting therefrom; claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person, or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance, or use of a motor vehicle; and claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. .5 All such insurance shall name Owner and Cedar Hills Investment, Inc. as additional insured." i 2. Add the following: "11.1.5 Contractor shall purchase and maintain as described insurance coverage commonly referred to as "Course ofConstruction" which shall insure all improvements constructed, installed, or provided by Contractor or their I Subcontractors. Such insurance shall cover all damage and losses including, but 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Supplementary General Conditions Project Number 106244 Page 5 shall not be limited to, fire, vandalism, malicious mischief, special extended perils (all risk), flood, earthquake, or any other perils Owner reasonably deems. Insurance policy shall include notice of cancellation to Owner of no less than 20 days. Additionally, policy will name Owner as Loss Payee." 3.7 ARTICLE 14, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT I A. Paragraph 14.2.2, delete in its entirety and replace with: I 1. "14.2.2 When any one of the above reasons exist, the Owner may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4: and .3 finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient." I "SECTION END" • 1 I I I 1 I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Supplementary General Conditions Project Number 106244 Page 6 • 01240 CONTRACTOR'S REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Administrative requirements for Requests for Information (RFI). 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Request for Information (RFI): 1. A document submitted by the Contractor requesting clarification of a portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as RFI. B. Improperly prepared RFI's: 1. RFIs that are not prepared properly (not having enough information to clearly describe the question or issue associated with the question). 2. RFIs submitted to request approval of submittals. 3. RFIs submitted to request approval of substitutions of products. ' 4. RFIs submitted to request changes which entail cost, credit or changes in contract time. 5. RFIs which have been directly submitted by Sub - Contractors. 1.3 CONTRACTORS RFI A. Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested information is not available in the Contract Documents. ' B. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents, the material, process, or system to be installed, the Architect shall be requested to make a clarification of the design intent. 1. Contractor shall submit a written RFI to the Architect requesting the clarification. The RFI shall be on the G716 AIA form or Architect approved Contractor's standard form and numbered sequentially. Each RFI shall bear the RFI number of the page(s) submitted. The RFI shall be fully legible after 1 photocopying, faxing, or transmitted via electronic means. 2. If a clarification is of an item, process or system known to have been prepared by a consultant to the Architect, the Contractor may direct the RFI directly to Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01240 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contractor's Request for Information Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 the consultant cons tant with a copy sent to the Architect. C. RFIs shall be originated by the General Contractor: I 1. RFIs submitted from subcontractor or material suppliers shall be submitted through, reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect. 2. RFIs sent directly to the Architect or the Architect's consultants that are not I submitted through, reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor shall not be accepted and will be returned unanswered. D. Contractor shall endeavor to keep the number of RFIs to a minimum. In the event that a series of RFIs related to a material, process, or system becomes unwieldy, in the opinion of the Architect, because of the number or frequency of RFIs submitted, the Architect may require the Contractor to submit future requests as either Submittals or Substitution Requests for change. In the event that the e e ent t at t e Contractor believes that an RFI response by the Architect results in a change to contract time or cost, Contractor shall not proceed with the work • indicated by the RFI until a Construction Change Directive (CCD) or Change Order (CD) is prepared and executed. RFIs shall not in themselves justify a change in contract cost or time. 1. Answered RFIs shall not be construed as approval to perform extra work. 2. Unanswered RFIs shall be returned with a notation: "Not Reviewed ". 3. Contractor shall allow up to 10 working days review and response time for RFIs. 1.4 ARCHITECT'S RESPONSE TO RFIs I A. Architect will respond to RFIs on one of the following forms: 1. AIA G716 (Request for Information) 2. AID G710 (Architect's Supplemental Instructions) 3. Architect approved Contractor's standard RFI form. B. Improper and/or Frivolous RFIs: Unanswered RFIs shall be returned with a notation: "Not Reviewed ". C. Architect may op to retain RFIs for discussion during regularly scheduled project meetings. D. All responses to RFIs from the Architect of Architect's consultants shall be I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01240 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contractor's Request for Information Project Number 106244 Page 2 I distributed to the Contractor by the Architect. 1.5 RFI LOG and TRACKING A. Architect and/or General Contractor shall prepare and maintain an RFI log. Log shall indicate the RFI number, the date the RFI was received and returned. B. RFI log shall be distributed and reviewed at the regularly scheduled project meetings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) ' PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) "END OF SECTION" I I 1 - I 1 I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rPo Section 01240 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contractor's Request for Information ' Project Number 106244 Page 3 I 1 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal Procedures. ' 2. Construction Progress Schedule. 3. Progress Reports. 4. Product Data. 5. Shop Drawings. 6. Samples. 7. Design Data. 8. Manufacturer's Instructions. 9. Manufacturer's Certificates. 1 10. Reference Standards. 11. Preferred Subcontractor List. 12. Submittal Processing. 13. Quantity of Required Submittals. 1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Master Submittal List. 1. Submit master submittal list identifying all submittals required. 2. Identify each submittal by title and appropriate specification number. 3. Sequentially number each submittal as submitted for review. B. Identification and Transmittal of Submittals: 1. Transmit each submittal with transmittal form. 2. Sequentially number the transmittal forms coordinated with the master ' submittal list and allow 10 days for Architect's review. Submit complete documents for each Specification Section. 3. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number (s), and specification section number, as appropriate. 4. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system ' limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Submittals 1 Projecf Number 106244 Page 1 5. Provide space for Contractor and d Architect /Engineer review stamps. C. Transmittal of Resubmittals: 1. Revise and resubmit submittals as required. 2. Identify all changes made since previous submittal. 3. Number transmittal forms for resubmittals using original transmittal number and "Resubmittal" in bold letters. I D. Distribution and Reporting Defects: 1. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. P p 2. Instruct parties to promptly report any defects or inability to comply with provisions of submittals. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES i A. Submit computer generated network analysis diagram using the critical path method, generally as outlined in Associated General Contractors of America (AGC) publication "The Use of CPM in Construction -A Manual for General Contractors and the Construction Industry ". B. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate 15 days after award of contract for Architects review. C. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, ' p q y ty, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. D. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. E. Indicate dates for starting and finishing piling work, foundations, structural • framing, roofing, enclosing interior space, mechanical system start -up, Substantial Completion, Owner Occupancy, and Final Completion. , F. When updating, indicate progress of each activity. G. Post updated progress chart at the site and review with attendees at g P ro ress meetings. H. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. 1.4 PROGRESS REPORTS Issued Weekly) Y) Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - - Submittals . Project Number 106244 Page 2 I A. Submit report on progress of various parts of work and indicate relationship between actual progress and progress schedule. B. Provide 2 week progress schedule identifying work and party responsible for performance of work. C. When updating, list proposed changes to keep the Project on the contract schedule for Substantial Completion. ' D. Provide listing of anticipated construction accelerations and delays. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA 1 A. When roduct data is required by a unit of work P q y section in this Manual, submit five copies of manufacturer's catalog sheets, brochures, diagrams, schedules, performance charts, illustrations, and other descriptive data on manufactured products and systems. ' B. Identify data sheets with the Section and Paragraph numbers where the product or system is referenced. ' C. Submit data sheets in preliminary closeout manual as specified in Section 01700, Contract Closeout. D. Architect review of Product Data is for conformance with design intent only. y. 1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS A. When shop drawings are required by a unit of work of this section in this manual, submit shop drawings showing shop assembly, field measurements, connections, details, dimensions, finishes, and fasteners. B. Submit the number of reproductions which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which will be retained by the Architect. ' C. Cross - reference shop drawings to drawing and detail numbers in Contract Documents. D. Architect's review of shop drawings is for conformance with design intent only. . y 1 E. For Contractor designed structural systems, submit shop drawings bearing the seal and signature of a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Oregon. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. • Submittals Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 I 1.7 ELECTRONIC DATA TRANSFER 1 A. General: The Drawings contained in the Contract Documents were prepared in part or in their entirety, on computers using Computer Aided Design software. I B. Contractor's Use of Electronic Media: Architect may make Site, Floor, and Reflected Ceiling Plans available to Contractor on Electronic Media Disks, after the contract is executed, to help expedite preparation of required submittal documents. C. Conditions of Use: In order to receive Electronic , o is Media Disks, Contractor must - make a written request to Architect, accompanied by a signed copy of the Data Request and Agreement for Use of Electronic Data, unaltered except for completion of required information. The agreement is included at the face of this section. ' D. Status of Electronic Media: Electronic Media Disks are NOT part of the contract. Contractor assumes full liability for information and conclusions made from them. 1.8 SAMPLES 1 A. When product samples are required by a unit of work of this section in this manual, submit product samples of size specified and of sufficient size to clearly show the characteristics, integral parts, and attachment of the product or system. i B. Identify the product samples with the Section and Paragraph numbers where the product is referenced. , C. Submit all exterior color and texture samples at the same time, to allow for coordinated review by Architect. , D. Review of product samples by Architect is for finish appearance and . conformance with design intent only. • 1.9 DESIGN DATA A. When design data is required by a unit of work � q y section in this manual, submit design drawings and stamped, engineered calculations for equipment and systems designed by subcontractors. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Submittals Project Number 106244 Page 4 B. Obtain approval of subcontractor design equipment and s � systems by Local Building Official prior to starting construction of subcontractor designed equipment and systems. ' C. Submit design drawings and structural calculations bearing the seal and signature of an Engineer registered in the State of Oregon. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When products and systems are to be fabricated and installed at the Site, ' submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start -up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When manufacturer's certificate is required by a unit of work section in this manual, submit the certificate to Architect for review, in quantities specified for ' Product Data. B. Indicate how material or product conforms to or exceeds specified ' requirements. Submit supporting references, affidavits, and certification as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be acceptable to Architect. 1.12 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. When products and systems are to be fabricated and installed at the site, and the fabrication and installation is specified using a reference standard, the contractor shall have on file at the Site one copy of the current standard prior to start of Site fabrication and installation. 1.13 SUBMITTAL PROCESSING A. Contractors' Review 1. Review submittals prior to submission. 2. Verify that field measurements and field conditions affecting shop Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C, Submittals Project Number 106244 Page 5 drawings have been reviewed. g 3. Verify that items proposed will work for their intended use. 4. Apply Contractor's Review Stamp and signature certifying that review, verification of required products, field dimensions, adjacent construction work, and coordination of information is in accordance with work and the Contract Documents. 5. Delivery quantity of submittals required by Contract Documents to Architect. ' 6. Include written notification to Architect when submittal deviates from requirements of Contract Documents. 7. Immediately incorporate required corrections in submittals and resubmit , submittals for further review when requested by Architect. . 8. Submittals not stamped and reviewed by the Contractor will be promptly returned prior to Architects review. B. Architect's Review: 1. Architect will review submittals for general conformance with design concept of the work and the information in the Contract Documents. 2. Architects' review of submittals will comply with AIA A201, General Conditions. Contractor shall allow up to 10 days for Architects review of submittals. ' 3. Architects review does not constitute approval of the fitness, design, or detailing of the items (s) depicted, or of the assembly of which the item is acomponent. 4. Architects review does not relieve the Contractor or responsibility for any • errors which may exist , or of the responsibility for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. 5. Architects review does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for adherence to the Contract Documents. 6. Architects review does not constitute a Change Order, or include any changes in the Contract Price or Time for Completion. 1.14 QUANTITY OF REQUIRED SUBMITTALS TO ARCHITECT A. Progress Schedule, Progress Reports, Design Data, Manufacturer's Instructions, ' Reference Standards, and Preferred Subcontractor List: 1. Submit three copies of 8 -1/2 by 11 inch submittals. t 2. Submit two copies for Architects use of submittals larger than 8 -1/2 by 11 inches. B. Product Samples: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Submittals Project Number 106244 - Page 6 1 1. Comply with each unit of work section covering specific products and systems for size and quantity of product samples where required. 2. Where quantity and size is not specified, submit quantity and size required to clearly show characteristics of products and systems. "SECTION END" 1 • 1 I I 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Submittals Project Number 106244 Page 7 1 01400 ' QUALITY CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quality Assurance and Control of Installation. ' 2. References. 3. Field Samples. 4. Mock -ups. 5. Contractor Designed Structural Systems. 6. Manufacturers' Field Services and Reports. ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 1. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality. 2. Verification from each manufacturer and supplier of equipment utilizing computer or microprocessor control shall be provided by written warrantee of compliance. ' B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect /Engineer before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the work except when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. I E. Perform work by persons p sons qualified to produce workmanship of specified ' quality. F. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. G. Should information in the Drawings and /or Specifications conflict with applicable codes or reference standards, codes and reference standards govern. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01400 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Project Number 106244 Quality Control P Page 1 • II 1.3 REFERENCES 1. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. B. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification for Architect /Engineer before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered a from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 FIELD SAMPLES A. Field Sample Procedures: a 1. When field samples are specified in a unit of work section, construct each field sample to include work of all trades required to complete the field III sample. 2. Construct field samples prior to starting related field work. I 3. Field samples may be incorporated into the project after acceptance by Architect /Engineer's Representative. 4. Remove unacceptable field samples when directed by Architect /Engineer. 5. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. 1.5 MOCK -UPS A. Mock -up Procedures: 1. When mock -ups are specified in a unit of work section, construct each mock -up to include work of all trades required to complete the mock -up. 2. Construct mock -ups prior to starting related assembly work. 3. Mock -ups may be incorporated into the project after acceptance by - Architect /Engineer's Representative. 4. Remove unacceptable mock -ups when directed by Architect/ Engineer's Representative. 5. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the work. • 1 1.6 CONTRACTOR DESIGNED STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS A. Engineering by Contractor: Contractor shall employ and pay Y p y p y for engineering Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 01400 Mildren Design Group, P.C.. Quality Control Project Number 106244 Page 2 • services from a structural engineer registered in the state g g where the building is constructed for structural design of Contractor structural systems, including but ' not limited to temporary shoring and bracing, formwork support, interior structural wall and ceiling systems, and support systems for fire sprinkler, ' plumbing, mechanical, and electrical systems and equipment. B. Testing and Inspecting by Contractor: 1. Contractor shall pay for preliminary testing of concrete and mortar mix design where required by Building Code prior to start of Contractor ' designed concrete and mortar work. 2. Contractor shall pay for required shop and site inspection of Contractor designed structural systems where required by Structural Engineer or building code officials. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S HELD SERVICES AND REPORTS A. Submit ualification q s of observer to Architect /Engineer 30 days in advance of required observations. B. When specified in individual specification sections, require produce suppliers • ' or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start -up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary. C. Inspector shall report observations and site decisions or instructions given to ' applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. D. Submit report in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. 1.8 CORRECTION OF DEFECTIVE WORK A. Remove and replace defective and condemned work at Contractor's expense until such work meets the requirements of Contract Documents. "SECTION END" 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01400 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Quality Control Project Number 106244 Page 3 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES ' PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Selection and Payment. ' 2. Laboratory Qualifications. 3. Test and Inspections Performed by Contractor. 4. Laboratory Responsibilities. ' 5. Limits on Testing Laboratory Authority. 6. Contractor Responsibilities. 7. Schedule of Inspections and Tests. 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance with requirements of Contract ' Documents. 1.3 INDEPENDENT TESTING LABORATORY QUALIFICATIONS ' A. Testing Laboratory shall meet Recommended Requirements for q o Independent Laboratory Qualification, published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. ' B. Testing Laboratory shall meet requirements of ASTM E 329. C. Testing Laboratory shall be authorized to operate in the State of Oregon. D. Testing Laboratory shall be acceptable to Owner, Architect, Structural Engineer, and local Building Authorities. E. Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. ' F. Calibrate testing equipment at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) or accepted values of Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 1 a natural physical constants. 0 1.4 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide qualified personnel at site and cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. B. Owner Required Specified Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform specified independent inspection, sampling, and testing of products in accordance with specified standards, to determine compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Provide sampling equipment and personnel, deliver samples to the testing laboratory, record field measurements, and cure samples as required by Contract Documents. C. Public Authority Required Tests and Inspections: 1. Perform specified independent inspection, sampling, and testing of 111 products in accordance with specified standards, to determine compliance with requirements of International Building Code (IBC) for Special Inspections required by Local Building Official. D. Special Tests and Inspections: 1. When directed by Architect, provide special tests and inspections Y P P p s to verify material compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and comply with General Conditions. 2. Owner will pay for special tests and inspections where work conforms to the Contract Document requirements. 3. Contractor will pay for additional tests and inspections where work fails to comply with Contract Document requirements as indicated in the General Conditions. E. Test and Inspection Reports Shall Include: 1. Project name and date of report. 2. Independent testing laboratory name, address, telephone number, and name of laboratory inspector. 3. Date, time, and location of sampling, testing, and inspecting. 4. Ambient temperature and weather conditions at the site or shop and curing conditions of samples. 5. Product identification and referenced specification Section number. II Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 2 6. Type of sample, test, and inspection and industry standard d for sampling and testing. ' 7. Results of sample, test, and inspection. 8. Evaluation of compliance with requirements in Contract Documents. 9. When requested by Architect, interpretation of test results. F. Distribution of Test and Inspection Reports: 1. Distribute one copy of soil and paving compaction and water and sewer line test and inspection report to Architect, Owner, Civil Engineer, local Building Official, and two copies to Contractor. 2. Distribute one copy of concrete, steel, and weld test and inspection reports to Architect, Owner, Structural Engineer, local Building Official, and two copies to Contractor. 3. Distribute one copy of roof inspection report to Architect, Owner, local Building Official, and two copies to Contractor. ' 4. Distribute one copy of manufacturers' field report to Architect, Owner, and two copies to Contractor. 5. Distribute copies of reports to all parties in a timely fashion. ' G. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. H. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non- conforming work or products. I. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect. 1 J. Attend preconstruction conferences. 1.5 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. ' B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. i D. Laboratory has not authority to stop the work. 1.6 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section Design Group, P.C. on 01410 Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 3 II A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples ry gn q p es of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the work and to the manufacturer's facilities. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. D. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. PART 2 PRODUCTS II 2.1 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Moisture and Density Tests for Soils and Aggregates: 1. When directed by Soil Engineer, independent testing laboratory will perform one moisture content and density of soil and soil aggregate test for each type of existing and imported fill and backfill material. 2. When directed by Architect's Representative, independent testing laboratory will perform one sieve test on each type of imported fill and backfill material in conformance with ASTM C 136 to determine particle size distribution of fine and coarse aggregate. 3. Soil and aggregate tests shall be performed by independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner. B. Shop Weld Inspection for Structural Steel and Steel Fabrications: 1. Inspection: AWS Certified Welding Inspector from independent testing laboratory will visually inspect 100 percent of structural welds and will inspect 25 percent of fillet welds and 100 percent of butt welds and moment connection welds by ultra -sonic or magnetic particle inspection. 2. Acceptance Criteria: AWS D 1.1, Paragraph 8..15.1 for visual inspection and Paragraphs 8.15.2.1 and 8.15.2.2 for ultra -sonic or magnetic particle inspection. 3. Shop weld inspections shall be performed by independent testing I laboratory employed by the Owner. C. Shop Weld Inspection for Prefabricated Cold- Formed Metal Framing, and Steel Pan Stair Systems: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 01410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 4 1. Weld inspections: AWS Certified Welding Inspector from independent testing laboratory will visually inspect 100 percent of structural welds and will inspect 25 percent of fillet welds by ultra -sonic or magnetic particle ' inspection. 2. Bend Tests: Perform bend test on 10 percent of shear connectors. 3. Acceptance Criteria: AWS D 1.3, Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5. 4. Weld inspections shall be performed by independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Soil Moisture and Density Tests by Independent Testing Laboratory: Y P g boratory: 1. Perform density tests by Sand -Cone Method, ASTM D 1556 for fill and backfill as directed by Soils Engineer. ' 2. Perform density tests by Rubber Balloon Method, ASTM D 2167 for fill and backfill as directed by Soils Engineer. 3. Perform moisture content tests by Nuclear Method, ASTM D 3017 for fill and backfill as directed by Soils Engineer. 4. Perform density tests by Nuclear Method, ASTM D 2922, and AASHTO T -238 for fill and backfill as directed by Soils Engineer. ' 5. Moisture and density tests will be performed by independent testing laboratory employed by Owner. B. Site Cast Concrete Tests by Independent Testing Laboratory: 1. Sample the first daily truck load of ready mixed concrete and each tenth ' truck load thereafter, complying with ASTM C 172. 2. Perform one slump test for the first daily truck load of ready mixed ' concrete and each fifth truck load thereafter, complying with ASTM C 143. 3. Perform one air content test for each set of compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 31. 4. Fabricate compressive strength specimens, complying with ASTM C 39. 5. Make one set of 5 compressive specimens for each day of structural ' concrete pouring or each 50 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each class of concrete. 6. Test two specimens after curing 7 days, two specimens after curing 28 days, and retain one specimen for later testing if required. 7. Comply with IBC Section 1905.6 for evaluation and acceptance of Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 5 1. II concrete. 8. Site cast concrete tests will be performed by independent testing laboratory employed by Owner. C. Site Weld Inspection for Structural Steel and Steel Fabrications: 1. Inspection: AWS Certified Welding Inspector from independent testing laboratory will visually inspect 100 percent of structural welds and will inspect 25 percent of fillet welds and 100 percent of butt welds and moment connection welds by ultra -sonic or magnetic particle inspection. 2. Acceptance Criteria: AWS D 1.1, Paragraph 8..15.1 for visual inspection and Paragraphs 8.15.2.1 and 8.15.2.2 for ultra -sonic or magnetic particle inspection. 3. Site weld inspections shall be performed by independent testing laboratory employed by the Owner. 4. Visually inspect 100 percent of field welded connections. 5. Visually inspect 100 percent of high strength bolted connections. 6. Perform additional inspections of field connections as required by Architect. "SECTION END" • ii I I a Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Testing Laboratory Services Project Number 106244 Page 6 ' 1 0 500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ' PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS ' A. Temporary Facilities by Contractor: 1. Contractor shall pay for power, water, and natural gas used for ' construction work until date of Substantial Completion. 2. Supplement the existing site power, water systems when required by specific construction activity. ' 3. Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful dispersal of hazardous substances into the building environment, to dissipate humidity, to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases, and ' to provide air movement for curing installed materials. 4. Exercise measures to conserve energy. ' B. Temporary Telephone and Facsimile Work: 1. Provide temporary construction telephone from start of construction at the site and maintain telephone until Substantial Completion. 2. Provide facsimile machine from start of construction at the site and maintain the machine until Substantial Completion. 3. Maintain temporary telephone service where Contractor's representative may be reached directly or by message. 4. Provide a 24 -hour emergency phone number to allow the Owner to contact the Contractor during nights, weekends, and holidays. C. Temporary Sanitary Facilities: 1. Provide temporary toilet facilities in accordance with local health codes for construction personnel. 2. Maintain periodically in clean and sanitary condition. D. Temporary Fire Protection: 1. Protect hazardous materials, rubbish, and flammable products from combustion. 2. Provide ABC type emergency fire extinguishers of adequate quantity, ' readily available and properly maintained. 3. Comply with state and local regulations governing occupational health Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01500 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Construction F_ acilities_and Temporary Controls . Project Number 106244 Page 1 a and safety. 0 E. Temporary Material Handling: 1. Provide temporary staging for construction work. 2. Provide temporary chutes, cranes, lifts, and products hoists for construction work. 3. Provide temporary scaffolding for access to work. 4. Provide temporary ramps, ladders, stairs, and guard rails for access to work. F. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of the structure and installed �S' PP P az3' PP stalled products prior to completion of vertical and lateral load support systems. 1.2 TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Vehicular Traffic Regulation: a 1. Do not obstruct public streets, parking areas, pedestrian walks, exit passageways, and loading areas without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Use existing parking areas only as authorized by Owner's Representative. 3. Provide barricades, warning signs, flagmen, and other traffic regulators as required to maintain safe traffic patterns around the building and site. 4. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. When traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. 5. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. B. Barricades: i 1. Provide barricades to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from construction operations and demolition. 2. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights -of -way. 3. Provide protection for plantings designated to remain. Replace damaged plantings. 4. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. C. Water Control: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01500 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1. Grade site to drain. 2. Maintain excavations free of water. ' 3. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. ' D. Security: Coordinate with Owner's security program. E. Access Roads: 1. Construct and maintain temporary roads accessing public thoroughfares ' to serve construction area. 2. Extend and relocate as work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. ' 3. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. 4. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. ' 1.3 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS ' A. Temporary Field Office: ' 1. Provide weather -tight temporary field office building with adequate meeting space, construction telephone, facsimile machine, electrical outlets, lighting, HVAC equipment, sturdy furniture, first aid cabinet, ' shop drawing and sample storage, and 4 foot long table for drawing review. 2. Provide temporary field office building from start of construction and ' maintain until new building is Substantially Complete. 3. Upon approval by the Owner, the Contractor may replace the temporary field office building with a temporary interior field office within the new ' enclosed building and maintain the interior office until Substantial Completion. 4. Acquire local governing jurisdiction approvals and pay all required fees for location of temporary office building (s). B. Temporary Storage Building: 1. Provide temporary buildings used for product storage, with adequate ventilation, fire extinguishers, and temperature controls necessary for products being stored. 2. Upon approval by the Owner, the Contractor may relocate temporary ' storage facilities within the new building and maintain the interior temporary storage facilities until Substantial Completion. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01500 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls I . Project Number 106244 Page 3 a D 1.4 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY BUILDINGS AND PRODUCTS A. Removal of Temporary Buildings: 1. Completely remove temporary buildings upon Substantial Completion. 111 2. Repair paving and landscaped surfaces damaged by temporary buildings, and their installation or removal, to match adjacent surfaces. B. Removal of Temporary Materials and Equipment and Restoration of Finishes: 1. Completely remove temporary interior field office before P �'3' Substantial Completion. 2. Completely remove temporary products and equipment upon Substantial Completion. 3. Repair damage caused by installation of temporary products and equipment and restore exposed finished surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. "SECTION END" I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01500 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 01600 ' MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Products. 2. Transportation and Handling 3. Storage and Protection. 4. Product Selection and Manufacturer's Instructions. 1.2 PRODUCTS ' A. Products Defined: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems of current manufacture included in the work, and not including machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. ' - B. Do not use products removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. ' C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. ' 1.3 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING ' A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. ' B. Arrange deliveries of products in accordance with approved Construction Progress Schedule identified in section 01300, Submittals. C. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original ' packaging, with identifying labels. ' D. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. ' E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 1 0 600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Materials and Equipment Project Number 106244 Page 1 I D 1.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION • A. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. B. Store weather - sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures and storage areas. C. Maintain temperature and humidity of storage areas within the ranges required by manufacturer's instructions. D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. E. Provide off -site storage and protection when site does not permit on -site storage or protection. F. Cover products subject to deterioration with substantial impervious sheet covering and provide ventilation to prevent condensation. G. Store loose granular materials on solid .flat surfaces in a well - drained area to prevent mixing with foreign matter. H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undamaged and are maintained under specified conditions. J. Provide substantial temporary coverings as necessary to protect installed products from damage resulting from traffic and subsequent construction operations. K. Remove temporary coverings when no longer needed. 1.5 PRODUCT SELECTION AND MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Product Selection: 1. Comply with specified industry standards. 2. Provide products in size, type, and quality indicated and specified, unless Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Materials and Equipment Project Number 106244 Page 2 variations are accepted by Architect in writing. Y g 3. Provide products with capacities, sizes, and performance ratings ' indicated and specified, unless variations are accepted by Architect in writing. 4. Two or more products of the same kind shall be identical and by the same manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1. Execute work in accordance with manufacturer's printed fabrication, ' installation, and application instructions. 2. Obtain and distribute copies of manufacturer's printed fabrication, installation, and application instructions to parties involved in the construction, in compliance with Section 01300, Submittals. 3. Handle, store, fabricate, erect, install, connect, apply, clean, condition, and adjust products and systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and in conformance with requirements specified in this manual. 4. Review and resolve conflicts between manufacturer's instructions and Contract Documents with Architect prior to fabrication and installation of products and systems. 1 "SECTION END" 1 I I I I I 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Materials and Equipment Project Number 106244 Page 3 a PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Product Selection. 2. Product Options. 3. Substitution Procedures. 4. Substitution Requests Prior to Bidding. I 5. Substitution Request After Contract Award. 1.2 PRODUCT SELECTION A. Product OP lions: 1. For Products specified by Reference Standards or by description only, select any Product meeting those standards or description. ' 2. For Products specified by naming one or mor manufacturers and allowing no options or substitutions, use products of manufactu -rers named and meeting specifications. 3. For Products specified by naming one or more manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions, Contract must submit a Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not specifically named. B. A Substitution Requests Constitutes q a Representation that Contractor: ' 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified M product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other work which may 1 be required for the work to be complete with no additional cost to owner. 4. Waiver claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re- approval by authorities. C. Substitution Procedures: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Mildren Design Group, P.C. Section 01630 Project Number 106244 Product Options and Substitutions Page 1 I 1. Substitution requests will be considered only if they are prepared on a copy of the Northwest Region CSI Substitution Request Form. 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete data, drawings, and samples as appropriate. 3. Substitution requests for a multiple list of mechanical and electrical components in one category of work by one manufacturer may be listed on one Substitution Request Form. 4. Additional copies of the Substitution Request Form may be obtained from • the Architect. 5. Requests for substitution of specified products after the Construction Contract is signed will be considered only at the Architect's request if the specified Product is unavailable, or the reduction in Contract Time or Contract Sum is proposed. 6. The Architect will notify the Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request. D. Consideration of Substitution Requests Prior to Bidding: If, in the Architect's I opinion the proposed Product is acceptable in lieu of the one or more Products specified, the Architect will include it in the Addendum which will be issued to all bidders. Substitution Requests received later than 7 days prior to bidding will not be considered. E. Consideration of Substitution Requests After Contract Award: If, in the Architect's opinion, the proposed Product is acceptable in lieu of the one or more specified Products, and the Proposed Substitution meets the requirements of Paragraph 1.2, C.5. above, the Architect will issue a Supplemental Instruction where Contract Sum or Contract Time is not changed, or a Construction Change Directive or Change Order where Contract Sum or Contract Time is changed. 1 "SECTION END" • 1 I I 1 I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01630 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Product Options and Substitutions Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Closeout Submittals. 2. Project Record Documents. 3. Closeout Manual. 4. Adjusting. 5. Warranties and Bonds. 6. Schedule of Closeout Submittals. 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certification: 1. Provide closeout submittals to Architect and Owner that are required by governing or other authorities. 2. - Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. ' 1.3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Document Filing: 1. Maintain and file at the site, one copy of Bid Documents, Contract Forms, I Project Manual, Contract Drawings, and Addenda. . Maintain and file at the site, one copy of Supplemental Instructions, Construction Change Directives, Change Orders, Field Orders, Reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Samples, Field Test Records, Field Observation Reports, Certificates, and Permits. B. Project Record Documents: 1. Keep current record of Contract Documents. 2. Architect will furnish one reproducible set of Drawings for recording changes in the work. ' 3. Record location of concealed items and utility lines, field changes in dimension or detail and changes in materials furnished. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01700 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Contract Closeout Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 4. Record changes from Supplemental Instructions, Construction Chang PP g Directives, Change Orders, Field Orders, and construction details no included in the Contract Drawings. t. 1.4 CLOSEOUT MANUAL A. Manual Format and Content Requirements: 1. Prepare closeout data in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 2. Use 8 -1/2 by 11 inch format in 3 -ring binder with indexed tabs. 3. List products, equipment, and systems used. 4. Divide closeout manual with tabbed dividers into four Divisions including Finishes, Operation and Maintenance Data, Warranties and Bonds, and Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials. B. Finishes Division: I 1. Indicate name, address, and phone number of finish manufacturers and installers. 2. Indicate manufacturer's product name, number of finish, and method of application. 3. Include manufacturer's product data, catalog number, color, texture, and instructions for care and maintenance of finishes. 1 C. Operation and Maintenance Data Division: Provide Operation and Maintenance Data in accordance with Section 01730, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered I operation. B. Adjust operating force required to activate handles, pulls, latches, locks, and 1 other operating devices on doors, cabinets, plumbing fixtures and storage facilities, other than exterior doors, to be no greater than 5 pounds- force. Devices shall have lever or other shape permitting operation by wrist or arm pressure and not requiring tight grasping, pinching or twisting to operate. C. Adjust operating force of doors along an accessible route to be no g reater than 8 2 pounds force for exterior doors and no greater than 5 pounds force for interior doors. ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01700 Milciren Design Group, P.C. Contract Closeout Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS A. Include notarized executed copies of manufacturer's warranties for each product where a warranty is required in the Specifications. B. Include- installer's guarantee for each finish or system where a guarantee is required in the Specifications. C. Include an insured bond for each system where a bond is required in the Specifications. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. 1 E. For items or work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.7 SCHEDULE OF CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS U A. Maintenance Materials: 1. Notify Owner's Representative 5 days prior to delivery of maintenance materials. 2. Label packages and deliver spare parts and maintenance materials to Owner's storage areas. 3. Submit quantity specified in each unit of work section. 4. Deliver transmittal letter to Architect to indicate quantity of materials delivered, date of delivery, and location of delivery. B. Closeout Manual: 1. Submit one copy of Closeout Manual PY prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Architect will return the manual after final inspection, with required corrections noted. C. Corrected Closeout Manual: Submit three corrected copies of the Closeout Manual within 7 days after receiving corrections from the Architect. ' D. Keys: 1. Submit three copies of keying schedule prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Submit keys in quantities and methods specified in Section 08710, Door Hardware. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01700 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Contract Closeout Project Number 106244 Page 3 I E. Certificates and Permits: 1. Obtain Certificates of Inspection and Certificates of Occupancy as required by Public Authorities. 2. Deliver certificates of Inspection and Certificates of Occupancy to the Architect's Representative at Completion of Work. F. Project Record Documents: Submit one copy of corrected Project Record Documents including drawings and Project Manual prior to Final Completion. "SECTION END" I I 1 1 I r r I r I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01700 MildrQn Design Group, P.C. Contract Closeout Project Number 106244 Page 4 01710 CLEANING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quality Assurance and Disposal 2. Progress Cleaning. 3. Final Cleaning. 1.2 DISPOSAL AND CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: ' 1. Provide dump box disposal equipment p p qu pment to store and remove construction debris. 2. Do not burn waste materials at the site. 3. Do not bury waste materials, excess materials, or debris on the site. 4. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, dangerous, or controlled substances into storm or sanitary drainage systems. 5. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from construction site periodically and dispose of in a lawful manner. 6. Comply with Local, State, and Federal regulations governing cleaning and disposal operations. B. Progress Cleaning: g g 1. Maintain work areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during construction activity. 2. Maintain site and storage areas in a clean and orderly condition during construction activity. 3. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from construction 1 periodically. 4. Add moisture to exposed earth materials to prevent blowing dust. 1 C. Final Cleaning: 1. Execute Final Cleaning prior to Substantial Completion. Provide follow- up cleaning after punch list, as required. 2. Employ experienced or professional cleaners for Final Cleaning. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01710 Mildren Design Group,,P.C. Cleaning Project Number 106244 Page 1 . 1 3. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view. 4. Remove temporary labels, stains, and foreign substances from surfaces exposed to view. 5. Polish transparent and glossy surfaces. • 6. Clean equipment and fixtures exposed to public to a sanitary condition'. 7. Clean mechanical and electrical equipment and spaces, including tops of pipes, ducts, equipment enclosures, and related constructions. 8. Clean or replace filters of operating equipment. I 9. Remove stains, spills, and foreign deposits from interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view. - - 10. Clean'debris from roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems. 11. Clean site, including landscaped areas, or rubbish or liter. 12. Sweep exterior paved areas to broom clean condition. 13. Rake clean landscaped surfaces to a smooth, even - textured surface. 14.. Remove waste and, surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities. 15. Remove foreign material from all storm drainage systems. If filtration type of storm system exists, replace cartridges. 16. Remove temporary protection devices and facilities, unless otherwise directed by Architect. 17. Repair paving, landscaped surfaces, sidewalks, curbs damaged be construction or temporary protection devices. _ , "SECTION END" 1 I 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01710 • Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Cieaning Project Number 106244 Page 2 • I 01730 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Format and content of manuals. 1 2. Instruction of Owner's personnel. 3. Schedule of submittals. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Prepare Instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and 1 operation of described products. 1.3 FORMAT A. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual. B. Binders: Commercial quality, 8 1/2x11, 3 -ring binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers; 3 -inch maximum ring size. C. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. D. Cover: Identify each binder with ed or printed title typ p t e OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; list title of Project; identify subject matter of contents. E. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual. F. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. ' G. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 -pound paper. H. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold ' larger drawings to size of text pages. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01730 Mildren Design Group, P.(. Operation and Maintenance Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 1.4 CONTENTS, EACH VOLUME r A. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; name, addresses, and telephone I numbers of Architect /Engineer, subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. B. For Each Product of System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. C. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable 111 information. D. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams(Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings). E. Type Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in section 01400. 1 F. Warranties and Bonds: Bind in copy of each as specified in Section 01700. 1.5 MANUAL FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES A. Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: Include product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. Provide information for re- ordering custom manufactured products. B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. C. Moisture Protection and Weather Exposed Products: Include p roduct data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and • repair. D. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification ' sections. Pacific Crossroads Corporate , 1 P Center Se ction 01730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Operation and Project Number 106244 Page 2 E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for inspection of data. 1.6 MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS A. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial member of replaceable parts. B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications. C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed. D. eratin Procedures: g es. Include start -up, break -in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions. E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routing procedures and guide for trouble- shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. G. Include manufacturer's rinted operation and maintenance P e instructions. H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed. K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed. L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center ec S hon 01730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Operation and Maintenance Project Number 106244 Page 3 • 1 M. Provide list of original f ' manufacturer's s space parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. ' N. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01410. O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections. P. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and � y space for insertion of data. 1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Before final inspection, instruct Owner's designated personnel in operation, I adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, at agreed upon times. B. For equipment requirement requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons within six months. 1 • C. Use operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. - D. Prepare and insert additional data in Operating and Maintenance Manual when 1 need for such data becomes apparent during. instruction. "SECTION END" I 1 1 1 . 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 01730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Operation and Maintenance Project Number 106244 Page 4 111 ' 2100 Site Preparation ' 2100 — Site Preparation Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, PC. It is solely the product of Rapid Soil Solutions. ' Part 1- General 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to perform all clearing and grubbing as shown in the Contract Drawings, and specified herein and as reasonably inferable there forth. B. Related Sections: ' Section 2200: Earthwork Section 2240: Cement Treated Sub -grade Section 2741: Asphalt Concrete Pavement 1 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS A. Geotechnical Report by Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC dated July 10, 2007. B. Oregon Department of Standard Specifications for Construction (OSSC), 2002. • C. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR) 340 -35 -0035 and 340 -45 -0005. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), current edition. E. ASTM D698, Test methods of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. F. ASTM D2041, Standard test method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. ' G. International Building Code (IBC) 2006. 1.3 SITE CONDITIONS A. Limits of the work Limits of work are identified on the grading and erosion control plans. Work outside the limits of construction is to be completed with proper permission of authorities having jurisdictions. 1 Part 2 — Materials NOT USED Part 3 — Execution 3.1 PREPARATION ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2100 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 1 Site Preparation i 2100 Site Preparation A. Verification of existing conditions 1. Verify location of all utilities 2. Verify location of survey monuments 3. Verify location of existing landscaping to remain (if any). Provide , protective measures if required. See landscaping drawings. 3.2 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING 1 A. Clearing and Grubbing shall consist of: Removal of brush and tree stems remaining above the ground surface. Removal of tree stumps and or roots greater than %" and other vegetation found below the ground surface. Removal of any partially buried natural or man made objects. B. Backfill of tree stumps and/or basement foundations shall be directed in Section 2200, Earthwork. C. Stripping of extra topsoil from the site can be stockpiled for future landscaped areas provided that necessary erosion control best management practices (BMP's) are installed around stockpiles. ' D. Dispose of waste materials and excess topsoil from the site in approved waste disposal sites. • I E. Install gravel construction entrances as prescribed on grading and erosion control plans. - 1 F. Prepare the site for wet weather conditions once clearing and grubbing has taken place using BMP's. I 3.2 COMPLETION A. Restoration of site improvements • 1. Restore any damage to existing conditions prior to the start of work. 2. Damages from the Contractor's activities are the sole expense of the Contractor. I END OF SECTION i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2100 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 2 Site Preparation - 1 ' 2200 Earthwork ' 2200 — Earthwork Section not prepared by Mi ldren Design Group, PC. It is solely the product of Rapid Soil Solutions. PART 1- GENERAL 1 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to perform all earth work as shown on the Contract Drawings and specified herein. B. The base bid for structural fill materials will be the native fine grained silt found at the site (excluding stripping) or selective structural fill as found in ' section 2.1. If the site soils are above their optimum moisture and soil drying cannot be accomplished by any method because of the weather conditions, see Section 2240, Use of Cement Treated Base or Import of Granular Materials in ' Section 2.1 C. Related Sections: Section 2100: Site Preparation Section 2240: Cement Treated Sub -grade Section 2741: Asphalt Concrete Pavement 1 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS A. Geotechnical Report by Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC dated July 10, 2007. B. Oregon Department of Standard Specifications for Construction (OSSC), 2002. C. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR) 340 -35 -0035 and 340 -45 -0005. ' D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), current edition. E. ASTM D698, Test methods of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. ' F. ASTM D2041, Standard test method for Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures. G. International Building Code (IBC) 2006. 1 1.3 DEFINTIONS 1 A. Sub -grade - Ground surface after clearing and grubbing. B. Borrow Material - Borrow materials provided for general embankment construction shall be soil that is free of unsuitable materials or other ' characteristics detrimental to the construction of firm, dense and sound embankments. Borrow materials provided for other uses shall meet the specified requirements for the use intended. 1 ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 1 Earthwork 1 2200 Earthwork • C. Selected Granular Backfill - Durable sand, gravel or combinations of these, selected as directed from specified excavations and containing no particle with any dimension greater than 75 mm (3 inches), or other unsuitable material. Reclaimed glass meeting the requirements of Section 02695 may be substituted for selected granular backfill. In addition, recycled concrete can also be used providing it meets the above gradation. Contractors electing to use recycled concrete should be advised that the moisture range for recycled concrete is very limited and so are quantities. For the use of recycled materials, concrete and glass aggregate, please refer to section 01400 Quality Control 1.4 • 1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Owner shall engage a Geotechnical Engineer as the Owner's on -site ' representative for quality control and observation of earthwork. B. The Geotechnical Engineer will evaluate materials proposed for use as fill and • backfill, perform and/or review appropriate tests, evaluate compaction and designate removal of un- suitable materials. The Contractor shall, in conjunction with the Geotechnical Engineer, mark areas of un- suitable materials. C. In place compaction tests or proof rolls will be made by the Geotechnical • Engineer or their representative. Twenty four (24) hours notice is required to - • schedule such tests. D. Over - excavation or covering of areas not yet inspected or tested by the Geotechnical Engineer will beat the sole expense of the Contractor. To schedule inspections please allow 24 hours notice. 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS A. Subsurface Information: 1. The geotechnical engineering report for this project is located in the addendum section of the specifications. The information contained herein does not reflect the change in the soil conditions from the time of the report to construction, nor does it reflect the warranty of the sub - surface conditions. 2. Additional explorations may be performed at cost to the Contractor, with no • additional cost to the Owner, and with written approval of the Owner. B. Existing Utilities: Provide adequate means of support and protection during g earthwork operations if utilities are to remain in place. , If uncharted utilities are located during construction activities, notify Owner immediately. I 1.5 PROTECTION , A. Protect survey benchmarks and monuments, fence, sidewalks, paving and curbs from equipment and vehicular traffic. B. Protect above and below grade utilities that are to remain. , Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 2 ' _ Earthwork I I 2200 Earthwork C. Notify Geotechnical Engineer and Architect when unexpected subsurface I conditions occur and discontinue effected work in the area until notified to resume work. PART 2 — PRODUCTS I 2.1 MATERIALS I A. Undocumented Fill Materials: none where encountered in earlier explorations. B. Imported Granular Fill: I 1. Shall meet the specification provided in OSC 00330.14 and OSSC 00330.15 2. Imported granular fill shall be well graded, pit or quarry run rock, crushed rock, gravel, or recycled glass or concrete meeting the I following graduation requirements: The Contractor is requested to produce a 5 gallon sample of granular backfill material to the I Geotechnical Engineer for testing with a least one week notice prior to placement so testing can be completed and the Contractor's field schedule met. I Sieve Size Percent Passing 2" square 75 -100 US No. 4 22 -100 _ I US No. 200 0 -10 max Sand Equivalent 27 min I C. Select Structural Fill to meet the gradation requirements stated above. D. Trench Backfill shall meet the following gradation requirements. The Contractor is requested to produce a 5 gallon sample of trench backfill I material to the Geotechnical Engineer for testing with a least one week notice prior to placement so testing can be completed and the Contractor's field schedule met. I Sieve Size 1 Percent Passing %" square 100 1" square 75 -100 I Y2" square 50 -100 US No. 4 20 -80 US No. 40 3 -24 I US No. 200 10 Sand Equivalent 27 min I E. Foundation Stabilization: An un- weathered, hard, durable, free draining material, visibly well graded from coarse to fine with the maximum size between 400 mm (15 inches) and 75 mm (3 inches). Rock fragments larger I than 400 mm (15 inches) but not larger than 900 mm (36 inches) may be included if placed as directed in 00330.42(c -2). If the 25.0 mm - 0 (1" - 0) portion exceeds 10% of the total volume by the Engineer's visual examination, I the 25.0 mm - 0 (1" - 0) material will be randomly sampled for testing. The Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 3 Earthwork 2200 Earthwork wet sieve test (AASHTO T 11) will be performed on the sampled material. The amount of material passing the 75 mm (No. 200) sieve shall not exceed 5% by mass (weight). F. Drain Rock: Meet the following gradation requirements. The Contractor is requested to produce a 5 gallon sample of drain rock material to the Geotechnical Engineer for testing with a least one week notice prior to placement so testing can be completed and the Contractor's field schedule met. Sieve Size Percent Passing 1" square 100 '/" square 80 -100 Y2" square 10 -40 US No. 4 0 -4 US No. 200 0 -2 1 G. On -Site Topsoil: Excess topsoil may be stockpiled in designated sites by the Owner and/or Architect. This stockpile has to be free of particles greater than 1 inch. Please refer to Landscaping Specifications for details. H. Geo- textile Fabric: Shall be Mirafi X- Series. Shall be used in roadways. No other material is allowed unless with written consent of the Geotechnical Engineer. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXCAVATION A. Excavation: Excavation consists of removal and disposal of materials encountered. It is not a bid item. 1. Excavate to depth, lines and grades as shown on the Contract Drawings or as specified. 2. Remove organic soils as directed in Section 2100, Site Preparation and the Geotechnical Report. 3. Notify the Geotechnical Engineer if the site soil conditions differ from those in the report. 4. If unsuitable materials are encountered at the required sub -grade elevations, contact the Geotechnical Engineer to verify. Once on site, the Engineer will choose the best method to rectify the problem with Contractor's assistance. Verification by the Geotechnical Engineer will ensure Contractor payment for over excavation due to soft spots or unsuitable materials. 5. Proof rolls will be required to determine any soft spots in the sub - grade and paving grades prior to rock placement, building slabs and asphalt paving. 6. If the Contractor elects to use materials that have not been approved by the Geotechnical Engineer he is doing so at his own risk. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 4 _ Earthwork 111 2200 C. Stripping of extra topsoil from the site can be stockpiled for future Earthwork landscaped areas provided that necessary erosion control best management practices (BMP's) are installed around stockpiles. 3.2 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION A. Proof rolls are required on the prepared sub-grade �l pep gr with a fully loaded dump truck or water truck in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer or their ' representative. B. Please allow 24 hours for scheduling proof rolls. C. Soft spots remediation will be directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The use of foundation stabilization rock found in Section 2.1 E will be used in large areas that might need to be over - excavated. D. Protection of the sub - grade: I 1. The on site SILTY soil is extremely moisture sensitive and cannot tolerate wheeled vehicle traffic. Do not allow equipment other than tracked vehicles over roadway sub - grades prior to placement of geo- ' textile material and the full layer of aggregate base course. 2. Contractor staging areas are labeled on the drawings. 3. Repair to roadway or building sub - grades cause by Contractor, will be repaired by over - excavation and the placement of geo- textile fabric and foundation stabilization rock will be at no cost to the Owner. 4. Gravel construction entrance shall be constructed as per the Contract Drawings: 3.3 SURFACE WATER CONTROL A. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavation. Remove water to prevent softening of excavations, footings. B. Comply with all local regulations regarding the disposal of storm water from the job site. ' 3.4 BACKFILL A. General Backfill: 1. Use of on -site materials is acceptable providing that the moisture content is within the optimum percentage range. A standard proctor value was run on the native soil as part of the geotechnical report. See Appendix B of the report by Rapid Soil Solutions. 2. If this is not possible due to wet weather conditions, there are two alternatives: ' a. Alternative 1- Over - excavation to at least 12 inches of the areas exposed to traffic and replace with foundation stabilization materials. ' b. Alternative 2 — Cement treat the sub -grade in the areas that will be heavily trafficked. See pecification section 02741. B. Compaction: ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 5 _ Earthwork • 1 2200 Earthwork 1. Building footprints are required to be compacted to 95% of a standard • proctor ASTM D698. • 2. Roadway aggregate base course is to be compacted at 95% of a standard proctor ASTM D698. 3. Landscaped areas, sidewalks, unpaved and unimproved areas can be compacted to 90 %. 4. Retaining walls shall have at least 6in of aggregate base course below the footing. The rock sub -grade shall be compacted at 95% of ASTM D698. 5. Trench backfill in structural areas shall be compacted to 92% in the pipe zone and within 3 feet of finished sub -grade 95% of ASTM D698. Trench backfill in area's that are not structural are to be compacted to 90% of ASTM D698. 6. Notification of 24 hours is require to the Geotechnical Engineer for the scheduling of compaction tests. C. Placing Fill Materials: 1. Using equipment selected by the Contractor based on his experience he will uniformly spread the fill materials around structures or roadways. Engineered fills will have lifts no greater than 8in's. 3. Compaction testing is required every 18in of material placed. D. Trench Excavation and backfill: 1 1. Excavation of trench should be net lines to the lines and grades shown on the drawings. The width of the trench's shall not be less than the diameter of the pipe plus 18in. 2. Pipe bedding shall be placed at least 6in over the top of the pipe. 3. Compaction standards at stated in section 3.4 B. 3.5 GRADING A. Grade the site to the tolerances noted on the drawings. ' B. Grade sidewalks and pavements to allow the storm water to flow away from the structures and into approved storm water disposal areas. 3.6 COMPLETION A. Remove all waste materials, including unacceptable excavated materials to 1 approved disposal sites as directed by the Owner. B. During the duration of the project comply with local regulations regard street sweeping. 1 END OF SECTION Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2200 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 6 . Earthwork ' 2240 Cement Treated Sub -grade 2240 — Cement Treated Sub -grade Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, PC. It is solely the product of Rapid Soil Solutions. PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to perform ' treatment of on -site soils. B. This work will consist of treating the upper layer of sub -grade with water and either lime, chloride, or Portland cement to form a stabilized course of ' material at the locations and to the lines, grades, thicknesses, and cross section shown or directed. C. Cement treatment is an elected option to utilize the sub -grade during the wet weather. The targeted 7 -day unconfined compressive strength is 250 psi. The percentage of cement will be determined by laboratory testing. D. Related Sections: Section 2100: Site Preparation Section 2240: Cement Treated Sub -grade Section 2741: Asphalt Concrete Pavement ' 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS ' A. Geotechnical Report by Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC dated July 10, 2007. B. Oregon Department of Standard Specifications for Construction (OSSC), 2002. ' C. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR) 340 -35 -0035 and 340 -45 -0005. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), current edition. E. ASTM D698, Test methods of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil ' Using Standard Effort. F. Portland Cement Association (PCA) SR221 S ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND SUBMITTALS A. The soil cement Contractor shall have experience of at least 5 projects in the same size and scope. B. All cement treating will be observed and tested by the Geotechnical Engineer or their representative. ' C. The Contractor will supply to the Geotechnical Engineer a 4- 5gallon sample of soil and cement to be used for laboratory testing and determination of the optimum cement ratio given the current soil conditions. Please allow for at ' least 10 working days for laboratory testing and review before field work is to start. D. The Contractor is advised to give 48 hours notice for the. start of cement ' treating operations. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2240 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 1 Cement Treated Sub -grade 1 2240 Cement Treated Sub -grade E. To assist the Contractor during the treatment operations, the Geotechnical Engineer will provide moistures in accordance with ASTM D2922. I 1.4 PROTECTION A. Curing - Limit traffic over treated sub -grade to equipment with tracks. Only I these vehicles will not cause any damage to the sub -grade and do not visibly deflect, ravel or wear the surface. Keep the finished surface moist and protect from rutting, spalling, displacement and disfiguration for a period of seven days, or until a subsequent course of material is placed which will prevent drying of the mixture by evaporation or absorption , PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Soil should be free of organics, clay balls, roots and particles greater than 3 inches. B. Cement shall be Portland cement, shall comply with the latest ASTM C150, CSA Standard A -5M or AASHTO M85) or blended hydraulic cements (ASTM C595 or AASHTO M240) excluding slag cements (types S and SA) for this application. 2.2 EQUIPMENT , A. Spreading Equipment shall be capable of uniform distribution of the cement. B. Mixing Equipment shall be either central plant mixed or for mixed in -place , method. No cement treated mixture shall be spread when the soil or sub -grade is frozen or when the air temperature is below 40degrees F in the shade. The total elapsed time between the addition of water to the mixture and completion of finishing shall not exceed 4 hours. The mixing time shall be that which is required to secure uniform mixture. C. Compaction Equipment shall be chosen by the Contractor using his experience with the soils in the area. The equipment shall have sufficient capacity to compact the soil cement ratio to the 95% ASTM D698. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 MONITORING A. The Geotechnical Engineer will verify that the site is ready for soil cement treatment. 111 3.2 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION A. Proof rolls are required on the prepared sub -grade with a fully loaded dump truck or water truck in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer or their representative. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2240 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 2 Cement Treated Sub -grade 1 ' 2240 B. Please allow 24 hours for scheduling proof rolls. Cement Treated Sub -grade C. Soft spots remediation will be directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The use of foundation stabilization rock found in Section 2.1 E will be used in large areas that might need to be over - excavated. ' 3.3 SUB -GRADE STABILZATION ' • A. See Section 1.3 Quality Assurance regarding details of notification of start of soil cement work. B. Based on SILTY soil found on the site and the forecasted traffic loading conditions, the depth of the cement treatment required is 12 inches or 1 foot. C. Finish the surface of the treated sub -grade so that it does not vary by more than 15 mm (1/2 inch) from the established grade and cross section at any point. When tested with a 3.6 m (12 foot) straightedge, the maximum ' variation of the finished surface from the testing edge is 15 mm (1/2 inch). D. After curing has taken place the Contractor is required to do a proof roll to determine if any soft spots exist. If found, soft spots will be evaluated by the ' Engineer. After review of the field notes taken during the cement treatment operation, the Engineer will determine if the guidelines establish by the 1 laboratory testing were followed. If they were not the remediation of such areas will be required at the Contractor's expense. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. The Geotechnical Engineer will have someone resent during the entire g ue cement treatment operation. They will work with the Contractor to ensure a ' quality product. The following field tests will be performed: moistures, compactions, % of cement used and field compressive strengths of the soil /cement mixtures taken both in the morning and afternoon. I I END OF SECTION Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2240 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 3 Cement Treated Sub -grade 1 1 02660 ' WATER DISTRIBUTION Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineering Inc. Consulting Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL Note: This section governs pipe outside the building to within 5 ft. of exterior wall. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: ' 1. Domestic and water distribution lines. ' 2. Valves and valve boxes. 3. Backflow devices. 4. Water Vaults. ' 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Submit product data on pipe, tapping sleeves and valves, backflow ' preventer, and valves. 2. Measure and record as -built measurements including size of pipe and fittings, grade lines, and location of utility connections on Project Record Documents. 3. Submit one copy of Project Record Documents including revised drawings and specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Regulatory Requirements: For all piping on the building side of the backflow preventors, comply with requirements of serving water utility, ' Fire District /Department and Uniform Plumbing Code, current edition. B. For all piping in the public right -of -way to the back flow preventors, ' comply with City of Tigard Standard Specifications and Details. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1.4 SITE CONDITIONS 1 A. Scheduling Pipe Hushing: ' 1. Notify Architect /Engineer and Local Utility 72 hours in advance of flushing operations. 2. Flush newly installed water and fire lines prior to hydrostatic and test and prior to disinfection. ' 3. Contractor to provide water for flushing /testing. B. Scheduling Pipe Testing: ' 1. Noti fy Architect /Engineer and Local Utility Representative 72 hours prior to testing. 2. Notify Architect /Engineer and Local Utility Representative 12 hours in advance of scheduled time, if test is canceled. , PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Grayiron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe: ' 1. Standard: Push -on joint Class 52 ductile iron, AWWA C 151 2. Cement Mortar lining conforming to: AWWA C -104. 3. Size: 3 to 20 inches in diameter. 4. Conform to City of Tigard Standard Specifications and Details ' B. Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: 1. Standard: AWWA C -110. I • 2. Pressure Rating: 250 pounds. 3. Conform to City of Tigard Standard Specifications and Details , C. Copper Service Pipe: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM B 88, Type K 2. Type: Soft- drawn, seamless, annealed copper tube. 3. Fittings: Brazed silver joints. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 D. PVC Plastic Service Pip e: ' 1. Industry Standard: ASTM D 2241 (SDR Series). 2. Weight: Class: 200. ' 3. Joints: Rubber gasketed, push -on. 4. Fittings: ASTM D 2467. 5. Joints on Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 3139. ' E. Tracer Wire: Stranded or solid, rubber or plastic coated, Number 12 copper wire. ' F. Gate Valves: 1. Acceptable to local water utility. 2. Industry Standard: AWWA C -500. 3. Type: Iron body, fully bronze mounted, double disc, parallel seat, non - rising stem, 0 -ring seal, 2 inch square operating nut opening counterclockwise with mechanical joint ends. ' 4. Working Pressure Rating: 200 psig. G. Backflow Preventer Valves: 1. Sized to fit water supply line. - 2. Precast concrete vault -sized in conformance with jurisdictional ' requirements. 3. Acceptable backflow preventer valves: acceptable to local water utility. ' H. Water Meters: Furnished by local ocal water utility. Installation of meter by ' City of Tigard. Contractor shall coordinate. I. Cast Iron Valve Boxes: ' 1. Acceptable to local water utility, City of Portland (Bureau of Water Works) ' 2. Cast iron, adjustable height with round or oval bottom hood sections to fit over top of valve. 3. Recess top section to receive a close fitting lid. PART 3- EXECUTION Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 I 3.1 PERFORMANCE I A. Trench Excavation, Backfill and Compaction: 1. Provide trench excavation, backfill, and compaction necessary to I install pipe, valve box, backflow preventer and fire hydrants. 2. Comply with requirements in Division 2, Earthwork. I B. Installation of Pipe: 1. Comply with requirements of the local I p y q ocal water utilities standard drawings and specifications. 2. Carefully lower pipe, fittings, valves, and hydrants into trench by I means of derrick, ropes or belt slings. 3. Do not drop or dump units into trench. I 4. Avoid abrasion of pipe coating. 5. Use wood poles with broad, flat faces as levers or skids to prevent damage to pipe and coating. I 6. Grade trench bottom to provide uniform support for pipe barrel. 7. When Work is not in progress, plug open ends to prevent substances from entering pipes, fittings, and valves. I C. Pipe Alignment: I 1. Determine alignment and grade before placing and backfilling , pipe sections. 2. Lay pipe in trench with bottom of pipe conforming to grade and alignment indicated on Drawings. 3. Install pipe within 0.2 feet maximum deviation from design I elevation and alignment. 4. Install pipe straight to visual observation by Architect /Engineer. 1 5. Adjust line and grade by scraping away or filling earth under body of pipe and not by blocking or wedging up. 6. • Do not exceed manufacturer's recommendation for deflections from I a straight line or grade, as required by vertical curves, horizontal curves, and off -sets. 1 I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution Project Number 106244 Page 4 I I • I I 7. If alignment requires deflection ' gn q in excess of manufacturer's I recommendations, furnish special bends to provide angular deflections within recommended limits. 8. Form short- radius curves and closures by shorter lengths of pipe, I bevels, or fabricated specials. D. Valves and Valve Boxes: I 1. Install valves and valve boxes where indicated on Drawings and I standard drawings for the local water utility. 2. Clean interior of valve before installing. 3. Plug valve at end of line prior to backfilling. I E. Tracer Wire: Provide No. 18 insulated wire buried with all nonmetallic pipe. Provide green insulated cover for storm and sanitary and blue I insulated cover for domestic water. F. Flushing: 1 1. Flush newly installed water distribution lines to remove foreign matter. I 2. Flush prior to hydrostatic testing and disinfecting at each extremity of main, including stub -outs and dead ends. 3. Furnish, install, and remove temporary pipes and fittings necessary I 4. to perform flushing. Contractor to provide water for flushing. I 3.2 COMPLETION A. Inspection: I 1. Architect /Engineer and the local water utility will inspect valve in open and closed positions to ensure parts are in working condition. I 2. Expose valve boxes for inspection. 3. Architect /Engineer and the local water utility has the option of checking mechanical joints to assure required torque as specified. I B. Hydrostatic Testing Requirements: Test in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements. I C. Survey Records: Provide as -built records g com P l Y in with Division 1. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution I Project Number 106244 Page 5 I 1 1 D. Pipe Repairs: ' 1. Where pipe coating or lining is damaged, make repairs satisfactory to Architect /Engineer and local water utility. 2. Remove and replace cracked or defective pipe, gaskets, mechanical joints, fittings, valves found defective with new components. E. Disinfection Requirements: Disinfect lines in accordance with local jurisdiction requirements. "END OF SECTION" 1 1 i 1 1 i 1 Pacific ' ac c Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02660 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Distribution Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 I 02720 ' STORM SEWERAGE SYSTEMS Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineering Consulting Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 Section Includes: A. Roof drainage more than five feet from building perimeter. t B. Parking lot drainage. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit rodu p ct data on manholes, storm water quality ' device, castings, catch basins, basin frames, and sewer pipe. B. Project Record Documents: I 1. Submit as -built drawings of sewer and drainage systems. 2. Record invert elevations and dimensions from sewer and drain ' lines to property and building lines. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to requirements of the local jurisdiction and Uniform Plumbing Code, current edition. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PIPE COMPONENTS A. Corrugated High - Density Polyethylene Pipe with an integrally formed ' smooth interior. • ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02720 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Storm Sewerage Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1. Industry Standard: ASTM —294. 2. Acceptable Tubing: ADS N -12 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc., I or equal. B. PVC Small Diameter Sewer Pipe: ' • 1. Industry Standard: Gasket bell end pipe, ASTM D 3034; SDR 35 from PVC components of ASTM D 1784, APWA C -900 as shown on plans. 2. Size: 6,12 inches: • I 3. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM F 477. 4. Fittings: Manufacturer's standard. - 5: Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. V ' C. Large Diameter Corrugated Metal Pipe CMP, Detention System . 1. 16ga. ALT2 2 2 /3x1 /2 CMP 2. Size 36" diameter 3. 16ga. ALT2 5 =C Bands w /Gaskets 4. 16ga. 30 "dia. risers / ladders • D. . Gray iron and Ductile Iron Pressure Pip e: • - ' •. ron ressure 1. Standard: - Push -on joint Class 52 ductile iron, AWWA C 151 ' 2. Cement Mortar lining conforming to AWWA C -104. 3. Size: 3 to 20 inches in diameter. V - 4: Conform to City of Tigard Standard Specifications and Details - E. Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe Fittings: ' 1. Standard: AWWA C -110. 2. Pressure Rating: 250 pounds. ' 3. Conform to City of Tigard Standard Specifications and Details • • 1 2.2 ACCESSORIES , Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center ' Section 02720 1 Mildreri Design Group, P.C. Storm Sewerage Project Number 106244 _ , Page 2 1 A. Single Filter g e Catchbasins: ' 1. Steel: 1/4 inch thick. 2. Size: 24 inches square. 3. Depth: 57 inches, minimum. B. Frame and Grate for Single Filter Catchbasins: ' 1. Industry Standard: Per maunfatcurer. atcurer. ' 2. Material: Cast iron. 3. Minimum Wheel Load: 16,000 pounds. 4. Pattern: Bicycle safe grate. ' C. Location Tracer: 1. Wire Size: No. 18, insulated. 2. Insulation Cover Color: Green. t D. Exterior Cleanouts: ' 1. Access Box: Heavy duty cast iron. 2. Covers, Flanges, Cleanouts: Cast iron. 3. Mounting: per standard drawings of local jurisdiction. 4. Acceptable Cleanout: Valley Iron and Steel Co.,No. 202. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Protection: Cover exposed ends of drain lines during construction work to protect lines from debris. B. Installation of Storm Sewer: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02720 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Storm Sewerage Project Number 106244 Page 3 i 1. Install bedding aggregate 4 to 6 inches thick in trench and excavate bedding for base of pipe and pipe bells. I 2. Install pipe system in sizes and locations indicated on Drawings with ells, tees, Y's, couplers and end plugs as required. 3. Continue storm sewer, roof drain, and foundation drain lines to storm sewer catch basin, drain ditch, or holding basin. 4. Install initial backfill aggregate to at least 6 inches over pipe and tamp and vibrate to required density. 5. Install location tracer wire over non - metallic pipe. 6. Backfill and compact subsequent lifts in accordance with Division 2, Earthwork. 7. Solvent weld PVC drain pipe joints in accordance with ASTM D 2855. ' 8. Install gasketed PVC sewer pipe joints in accordance with ASTM D 3212. 9. Test as per local jurisdiction requirements. , 3.2 COMPLETION i A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Repair or replace defective lines and system components. 2. Excavate and recompact backfill where settlement damages site improvements. 3. Replace or repair walks, paving, and landscape improvements damaged by backfill settlement. B. Final Cleaning: Remove excess soil materials from paving, walk, and landscape areas as soon as backfilling is complete. ' "END OF SECTION" i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02720 1 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Storm Sewerage Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 02730 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C. It is solely the product of AAI Engineering Consulting Engineers ' PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: Sanitary Sewer More Than Five Feet From Building Perimeter. 1.2 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: Submit product data on sewer pipe and cleanouts. B. Project Record Documents: ' 1. Submit as -built drawings of sanitary sewer system. 2. Record invert elevations and dimensions from sewer lines to property and building lines. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Owner will obtain permits and pay fees for connecting new sanitary sewer system to existing sanitary sewer systems. 2. Conform to requirements of the City of Tigard for work in public ' right -of -way and to the Iriternationa1; ;B iilding C de_ for sanitary pipework on private property. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE COMPONENTS ' A. PVC Small Diameter Sewer Pipe: 1. Industry Standard: Gasket bell end pipe, ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 from PVC components of ASTM D 1784. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings. ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Sanitary Sewer Systems Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 I 3. Rubber Gaskets: ASTM F 477. 4. Fittings: Manufacturer's standard. 5. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Location Tracers: 1. Wire Size: No. 18, insulated. 2. Insulation Cover Color: Green. B. Exterior Cleanouts: 1. Access Box: Heavy duty cast iron. 2. Covers, Flanges, Cleanouts: Cast iron. 3. Mounting: per standard drawings of local jurisdiction. 4. Acceptable Cleanouts: Valley lion and Steel Co.,No. 202. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation and materials to conform with Jurisdictional Standards. ' B. Protection: Cover exposed ends of sewer lines during construction work to protect lines from debris. C. Preparation: ' 1. Trench soil to size required for installation, inspection, and backfill compaction. ' 2. Fill trench with bedding aggregates to height required for continuous slope in sewer pipe. D. Installation of Sewer Pipe: 1. Install bedding aggregate 4 inches thick in trench and excavate ' bedding for base of pipe and pipe bells. 2. Install pipe system in sizes and locations indicated on Drawings with fittings as required. ' 3. Install initial backfill aggregate to at least 6 inches over pipe and tamp and vibrate to required density. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Sanitary Sewer Systems Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 1 4. Install location tracer wire over non - metallic pipe. r 5. Backfill and compact subsequent lifts in accordance with Division 2, Earthwork. 6. Test and provide data as per local jurisdiction requirements. 3.2 COMPLETION ' A. Adjusting Defective Work: ' 1. Repair or replace defective lines and system components. 2. Excavate and recompact backfill where settlement damages site improvements. 3. Replace or repair walks, paving, and landscape improvements damaged by backfill settlement. B. Final Cleaning: Remove excess soil materials from paving, walk, and landscape areas as soon as backfilling is complete. . "END OF SECTION" 1 1 1 I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02730 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Sanitary Sewer Systems Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 ' 2741 Asphalt Concrete Pavement ' 2741 — Asphalt Concrete Pavement Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, PC. It is solely the product of Rapid Soil ' Solutions. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to perform asphalt concrete paving on the site as directed by the drawings and specified herein. B. The required thickness for asphalt paving is 4 inches with a total of 8 inches of rock below (6 inches of 1 %" minus and 2 inches of '/<" minus with fabric below). C. Related Sections: Section 2100: Site Preparation Section 2200: Earthwork ' Section 2240: Cement Treated Sub -grade 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS AND DOCUMENTS 1 A. Geotechnical Report by Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC dated July'10, 2007. B. Oregon Department of Standard Specifications for Construction (OSSC), 2002. ' C. Oregon Administrative Rules (OAR) 340 -35 -0035 and 340 -45 -0005. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), current edition. E. ASTM D698, Test methods of Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil ' Using Standard Effort. F. Portland Cement Association (PCA) SR221S 1 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Paver shall have at least 5 years experience with projects of similar size. B. The Geotechnical Engineer or their representative will be on -site continuously during the paving operations. Please schedule at least 24 hours ahead. C. Paving will not take place with ground temperatures below 50 degrees. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Base Aggregates shall be between'/" and 1 1/2" and meet OSSC for crushed rock or gravel with 5% passing No. 200 sieve. ' B. Asphalt Concrete Materials shall be Level 2 - %Z" mix design according to OSSC 00745.10 C. The use of Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) is governed by ODOT TM 323 and AASHTO T308 shall not be greater than 30% in the new mix design. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2741 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 1 Asphalt Concrete Pavement 1 2741 Asphalt Concrete Pavement 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. The Contractor shall provide equipment capable of meeting the compaction criteria of 91% of ASTM T209 for the first lift and 92% for the second lift. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SUB -GRADE PREPARATION A. Proof rolls are required on the prepared sub -grade with a fully loaded dump truck or water truck in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer or their representative. Compaction testing is required on final lift of aggregate base course of 95% of ASTM D698. B. Please allow 24 hours for scheduling proof rolls. C. Soft spots remediation will be directed by the Geotechnical Engineer. The use of foundation stabilization rock found in section 2.1 E will be used in large areas that might need to be over - excavated. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Place asphalt concrete in accordance with OSSC 0745. B. The maximum lift height is 3 inches. • C. Place asphalt between the temperatures of 240 -325 degrees F. D. Do not compact newly placed asphalt when the temperature is below 175 degrees F. E. Compaction is required to be 91% for the first lift and 92% for the second lift as per ASTM T209. Testing to be performed randomly on the work area. F. Comply with the paving tolerances specified on the Contract Drawings. ' 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Geotechnical Engineer or their representative will be on -site during the , entire paving operation sampling and performing compaction tests. I I i END OF SECTION Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 2741 Rapid Soil Solutions, LLC 2 Asphalt Concrete Pavement 1 1 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Traffic lane and parking stall striping, handicap symbols painting, and directional arrow painting. Included in this section and portion of the contract is all handicap stall signage per City of Tigard and ADA standards. Also included is the van accessible signage for those stalls with 8' wide diagonally striped handicap access ways. All striping shall be completed as shown on the site plans. 1.2 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not apply marking paint when wind velocity exceeds 15 mph. 2. Do not apply marking paint when pavement temperature is less than 40 F., and ambient air temperature is less than 45 F. • 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Perform pavement marking work after installation of concrete curbs and walks. B. Perform pavement marking work after curing and sealing asphaltic concrete paving. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS: A. Paint: 1. Fuller O'Brien, South San Francisco, CA, - (888) 265 -6753 2. Miller Paint Co., Portland, OR (503) 233 -4491 3. Benjamin Moore Paints, Montvale, NJ (888) 777 -3012 ext. 101 4. Sherwin - Williams Co., Portland, OR (800) 321 -8194 B. Other manufacturers: Submit substitution request prior to bid date in accordance with section 01630, product options and substitutions. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rPo Section 02765 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Pavement Markings Project Number 106244 Page 1 I I 2.2 MATERIALS: A. Traffic Marking Paint: 1. Industry Standard: AASHTO M -248, Type 3F I 2. Acceptable Traffic Marking Paints: a. Fuller O'Brien: Traffic Paint, 25524 (white) and 43613 (red). b. Miller Paint Co.: Zone Marking Paint, 8000 White and 8014 Red. c. Benjamin Moore Paints: Safety Zone Marking Paint, White (1) and Red (20) d. Sherwin - Williams Co.: Hotline Fast Dry Latex Zone Paint, TM2152 (White) and TM 2132 (Red.) 2.3 EQUIPMENT: A. Apply paint with motor powered atomizing spray striping machine B. Adjust pavement marking equipment to level required to apply paint at specified film thickness. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION AND PREPARATION: A. Protection: Place temporary barricade and rope or plastic cone barriers to keep 1 vehicular traffic off striping until paint is dry. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Pressure wash surface and blow dry wet areas prior to applying paint. 2. Notify Architect to review line and symbol layout prior to starting striping work. 3. Perform satisfactory film thickness test prior to applying paint. I 3.2 PAVEMENT STRIPING A. Spray apply paint with straight edges, true alignment, and uni g uniform wet film thickness if 17 mils with thickness variation not to exceed 2 mils B. Form handicap symbols and arrows templates. C. Apply white paint to paving areas ' 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02765 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Pavement Markings Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 D. Apply red paint to curbs and n pp y p d o parking striped paving areas. E. Apply parking area striping in 3" wide lines. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Remove misplaced marking paint form concrete surfaces. B. Cover misplaced paint on asphaltic concrete with asphalt emulsion. "SECTION END" I 1 I I I I I 1 I I 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 2 rP 0 765 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ _ Pavement Markings Project Number 106244 Page 3 02774 CEMENT CONCRETE CURBS AND WALKS PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Exterior concrete curbs, walks and ramps. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS ' A. Design Requirements: 1. Design formwork to support structural loads, hold concrete to correct size and alignment, and meet tolerances indicated in ACI 347 and ACI 301. 2. Finish concrete curbs and walks with Class B tolerance, 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum variation. B. Submittals: 1. Submit product data for concrete curing and hardening materials. 2. Submit shop drawings to indicate location of concrete expansion, control, and isolation joints prior to pouring concrete. 3. Submit laboratory and field test reports for concrete Work. 4. Submit batch tickets from concrete supplier to Architect, complying with requirements of Article 16 in ASTM C 94. C. Field Samples: 1. Provide 100 square foot field sample of concrete walk finish. 2. • Acceptable samples may be incorporated in Work D. Temperature and Weather Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete when temperature or weather will detrimentally affect performance or appearance of concrete. 2. Maximum Wind Velocity: 15 mph. 3. Minimum Ambient Temperature: 40 Degrees F. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 1 I 4. Precipitation: None expected in 8 hours. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Concrete Installers: I 1. Installer shall be regularly engaged in concrete work and shall have successfully accomplished concrete work in similar size and quality. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Substitute Manufacturers: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Forms and Formwork Accessories: 1. Exposed Plywood Forms: Plyform, Class I or Class II. I 2. Lumber and Steel Forms: Smooth face lumber or steel. 3. Chamfer Strip: 1 -inch radius. 4. Steel Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40. 5. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: 2 -inch thick, ASTM D 1751, Homex 300 by Homasote Company, 609 - 883 -3300. 6. Form Joint Tape: Closed cell PVC foam with pressure sensitive adhesive on one side. B. Concrete Reinforcing: 1. Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. 1 C. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or yp o II. 2. Standard Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 3. Water: Clean, free of oils, acids, organic material. 4. Air - Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. 5. Water - Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A, water reducing or I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 2 I I Type D, water-reducing and re yp g retarding. 6. Mineral Admixture: ASTM C 618, Class F or Class C. D. Exterior Acrylic Curing Compound: ' 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Clear. 2. Acceptable Compounds: Spartan-Cote by Burke, Polyseal by Chem - Masters, J -20 Day -Chem Cure & Seal by Dayton Superior, Kure -N -Seal by Sonneborn, Sealtight CS -309 by W.R. Meadows, Sikagard by Sika, Cure & Seal by Symons, Polyclear by Bostik. E. Poured Paving J oint Sealers: t 1. Industry Standard: AASHTO M173 or ASTM D 1190. F. Bonding and Patching Compounds: 1. Acrylic Bonding Agents: ASTM C 932. 2. Epoxy Bonding Agents: ASTM C 881. 3. Patching Compounds: Two component cement base and acrylic polymer, with minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 28 days. G. Concrete Curing Membranes: 1. Polyethylene: ASTM D 4397, clear or white, minimum 6 mils thick. 2. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Pedestrian Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Orange Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp. 3. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Non - Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Sisalkraft SK -10 by Fortifiber Corp. 2.3 MIXES A. Mix Proportioning: 1. Comply with ACI 211.1. U 2. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301. 3. When using Method 3, proportion concrete with a maximum water /cement ratio of 0.49. 4. Maximum Pozzolan Weight shall be 18 percent of cement weight. 5. Adjust concrete mix designs when material characteristics, site conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant a I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 3 • I revised mix design. 6. Do not use revised mix design until accepted by Architect's • ' Representative. B. Mixing Procedures: 1. Comply with ASTM C 94. • 2. Mix full load for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site. I 3. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding water. ' C. Mix Requirements: 1. Maximum Course Aggregate Size: 3 4 inch. 2. Maximum Slump: 3'inches plus or 'minus 1 inch. 3. Entrained Air: 6 percent plus or minus 1 percent. 4. Minimum Compressive Strength: f'c = 4,000 psi in 28 days. 5. Probability of Test Falling below Specified Strength: One in five. 6. Minimum Cement Plus Pozzolan Content: 550 pounds per cubic yard. 7. Water Reducing Admixture: Type A or D: I PART 3 = EXECUTION • 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Protection: I • 1. Coat aluminum embedded in concrete prior to concrete placement. B. Surface Preparation: • 1. Clean and adjust forms, joints, and embedded items. 2. Check reinforcing placement and reinforcing support items and adjust reinforcing prior to placing concrete. - 3. Moisten dry substrates prior to placing concrete.. 4. Remove mud, dirt, and ice from formwork surfaces and soil substrates. C. Site Fabrication of Formwork: 1. Comply with requirements in ACI.301 and ACI 347. - 2. Fabricate corners and intersections flush without visible offsets. 3. -.. Fabricate, camber, and reinforce forms to meet 1/4 inch in 10 feet '. . Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section. 02774 • Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 4 maximum deflection. M 4. Fabricate solid blocking behind formwork panel joints. 5. In lieu of fixed forms, the installer may place paving concrete with a slipform paver designed to spread, consolidate, screed, and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete pass of the machine. D. Installation of Formwork and Joint Materials: 1. Install expansion joints between existing and new concrete and as required. 2. Install chamfer strip at exposed external vertical corners. 3. Install isolation joints where items penetrate concrete slabs. 4. Apply form coatings and release agents to concrete contact surfaces of removable formwork. E. Installation of Reinforcing: 1. Lap continuous grade 60 bars 36 diameters and not less than 24 inches. 2. Stagger reinforcing splices 36 inches minimum. 3. Cover reinforcing with concrete to comply with building code. F. Concrete Delivering, Mixing, and Placing: 1. Haul ready mixed concrete in truck mixers or truck agitators and deposit in place within 90 minutes from the time water is added to the mix. 2. Before placing concrete, remove freestanding water, snow, ice, and other foreign materials from subgrade. 3. Clean forms, secure forms in position, and coat forms with a form - release agent. 4. Notify Architect /Engineer and Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to placing concrete. 5. Do not place concrete until Architect has examined formwork and reinforcing steel. 6. Comply with ACI 301 and 304, placing concrete in a continuous operation within planned sections. 7. Consolidate placed concrete using mechanical vibrating equipment with hand rodding and tamping. 1 8. Work concrete around reinforcement, embedded items, and forms. G. Adjusting, Removing and Reusing Forms: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 5 1 I 1. Adjust formwork after pouring concrete, to eliminate excessive deflection. 2. Remove forms when concrete has attained its required strength. 3. Clean concrete contact surfaces and reapply form release agents prior I to reusing forms. H. Floated Slab Surface: , 1. Provide floated slab surface to receive a broomed finish, complying with ACI 301. 2. Begin floating when water sheen has disappeared and surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit float finishing. 3. Check plane of surface with a 10 -foot straightedge at two or more angles during or after first floating. 4. Cut high spots and fill low spots during floating to level concrete to Class B tolerance, 1 /a inch in 10 feet. 5. Refloat immediately to a uniform sandy texture. I. Slab Finishing: 1. Provide a broom finish for exterior walks and curbs complying with I ACI 301. 2. Provide a nonslip ADA approved textured finish for exterior ramps as indicated on Drawings, complying with ACI 301. Provide written jurisdictional approval prior to placement of concrete. 3. Tool exterior slab, walk, ramp, and curb exposed edges to not less than 3/4-inch radius. 4. Saw cut or tool form crack control joints to 1/4 of slab thickness as soon as concrete has hardened to permit sawing without excessive raveling. 5. Finish concrete horizontal surfaces to tolerances specified in ACI 301. 6. Extend expansion and isolation joints completely through curbs and walks. I 7. When approved, installer shall make minor adjustments in joint location to make joints coincide with drainage or other slab penetrations. ' J. Curing Procedures: • i 1. Cover exposed surfaces and protect concrete surfaces from loss of moisture, rapid temperature change, and mechanical damage for 72 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 6 • I • • hours minimum, complying with recommendations in ACI 308. 2. As as finished concrete is free of surface water, spray apply solvent based, acrylic curing compound at manufacturer's recommended rate, on exterior concrete surface.. ' 3. Place insulating materials over concrete when temperature drops below 35 degrees F. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Tests: 1. Comply with current Building Code for evaluation and acceptance of concrete. 111 2. When required by Building Code, Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate site cast concrete curbs, ramps, and walks. 3. Concrete strength tests for quantities less than 50 cubic yards will not be required when waived by Building Official and Architect, in accordance with current Building Code. B. Repairing Exposed Vertical Concrete Surfaces: • 1. " Clean dampen, and brush -coat concrete patch areas p p eas with acrylic or epoxy bonding agents. 2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. 3. Compact and screed patching compound in place as recommended b _ P p g P p by patching compound manufacturer. 4. Finish exposed concrete patches to match adjacent surfaces. 5. Strike off excess patching compound at exposed surface. 6; If defects in color and texture of concrete surface cannot be repaired, remove and replace the defective concrete. C. P rotection: 1. Barricade areas containing fresh concrete slabs, ramps, curbs, and walks for 24 hours minimum. 2. Barricade parking pavement areas for 72 hours or until concrete compressive strength is 75 percent of concrete design strength. I . 3. Restrict traffic in _ parking pavement areas to 'passenger cars and light trucks for seven days after placing concrete. 4. Cover fresh concrete curbs, walks, and ramps with / inch thick, Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center . . Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. ' - Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks I Project Number 106244 • . Page 7 I 1 plywood or oriented strand board for 48 hours minimum where exposed to public, pedestrian, and animal traffic. 5. Protect concrete from shrinkage crack damage until protected by curing procedure. 6. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by I air temperatures above 75 degrees and below 45 degrees F during curing period. "END OF SECTION" I I I • I I I I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02774 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cement Concrete Curbs and Walks Project Number 106244 Page 8 I I 1 02810 ' IRRIGATION Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C. It is solely the product of Clifford Design. PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Section includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, machinery and equipment necessary to install a complete and operating automatically controlled irrigation system. 2. Provide landscape sprinkler system; sleeving; automatic controls and connections to control valves; connection to water service; related equipment and connections; record drawings; and maintenance and operating instructions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Landscape - See Section 02900 1 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design/Build irrigation system by a qualified and certified landscape contractor. B. Full and complete head to head irrigation coverage is required. Make adjustments to irrigation zone pressure and layout to achieve full coverage of irrigated areas without overthrow onto roadways, sidewalks or buildings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Point of Connection Water pressure Test: Test pressure at the irrigation system point of g Y P connection prior to beginning work. Submit results of the test to Construction Manager. B. Record Drawings: 1. Maintain a complete set of plans at the job site, corrected daily to show location of system components. 2. At completion, submit 2 sets of irrigation record drawings to the General Contractor or Owners Representative. Plans to include locations of all mainline, valves, backflow device, zone outlines and other system elements. All system equipment that requires automatic or manual operation and/or regular maintenance must be visible and accessible at or above the finish grade. Equipment must be inside a protective box with 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02810 Mildren Design Group. PC Irrigation Project Number 106244 I 1 accessible lid. On record drawings, indicate locations of any system equipment that cannot be seen with dimensions from buildings, curb lines, or other fixed site feature. I C. Submit two sets of controller keys, hose swivels, quick couplers and other tool devices required to access, operate or maintain the system. I D. Operating and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit a clearly formatted controller schedule showing on a weekly basis the day, time and duration of watering for each control valve. 2. Provide a reduced sized zone map and controller timing schedule, folded into a plastic I envelope and place inside the door of the controller. 3. Submit operating and maintenance data for the entire system and for each piece of system equipment. Include instructions for system winterization. I 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Project Manager supervising the irrigation installation shall have a minimum of 5 years of irrigation experience and be on site during the installation and initial operation of the system to assure the highest quality standards and workmanship. 1 1.06 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store and protect all plastic irrigation material out of direct sunlight B. Exercise care in handling, loading and storing all material. Store irrigation pipe in areas I long enough to allow pipe to lay flat and straight. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Prior to start of any work, locate all underground utilities. Look for any misc. piping above ground as well as below ground that may interfere with system installation. Be aware of any overhead lines when operating heavy equipment. Provide adequate protection for all existing utilities. B. Notify Project Manager � ger of any unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected. C. Field Measurements: Take accurate field measurements of irrigated areas to determine if differences occur between plans and ground dimensions. Field adjust parts of the irrigation system to obtain required head to head coverage without overspray onto buildings, streets or sidewalks. If necessary, redesign and resubmit irrigation plans to the on -site Supervisor when changes require complete zone(s) modifications. 2 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02810 Mildren Design Group. PC Irrigation Project Number 106244 I I 1 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Begin irrigation work only after the finish grade has been established in the work area and is satisfactory for proper system installation. 1 B. Complete system installation and make it fully operational before landscape seeding and planting take place. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Maintain and operate irrigation system until Substantial Completion has been reached and continue servicing and maintaining system throughout warranty period. B. Repair the settling of irrigation trenches and correct any system problems or damage during warranty period. Adjust irrigation watering schedule as needed during differences in weather conditions so as not to over water plantings or prevent adequate water requirements for optimal plant growth. 1.10 PROJECT COMPLETION A. System Operation Orientation: 1. Upon completion of both the irrigation system and landscape installation, the Landscape Contractor will schedule a walk -thru with the Owners Representative. A training and orientation session covering the operation, adjustments and maintenance of the irrigation system will take place at this time. The written Maintenance Schedule and Operating Manual shall be reviewed and explained. END OF SECTION I I 3 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02810 Mildren Design Group. PC Irrigation Project Number 106244 • 02830 ' SEGMENTED RETAINING WALL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Description 1. Work includes designing, furnishing and installing segmental retaining wall (SRW) units to the grades designated on the Construction Documents 2. Furnishing and installing appurtenant materials required for construction of the retaining wall. 3. Work includes preparing foundation soil, furnishing and installing leveling pad, unit drainage fill at lines and grades designated on Construction Documents. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Segmental Retaining Wall Units 1 ASTM C 1372 Standard Specification for Segmental Retaining Wall Units. 2. ASTM C 140 Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. B. Geosynthetic Reinforcement 1. ASTM D 4595 Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide -Width Strip ' Method. 2. ASTM D 5262 Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfirmed Creep Behavior of Geosynthetic 3. GRI:GG1 Single Rib Geogrid Tensile Strength 4. GRI:GG5 Geogrid Pullout C. Drainage Pipe 1. ASTM D 304 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe 2. ASTM D 1248 Specification for Corrugated Plastic Pipe D. Engineering Design: "NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls ", latest edition. ' 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1 I A. Construction of SRW shall be performed by contractor that has been approved by the manufacturer. 1. Contractor shall submit a list of (5) five previously constructed projects of I similar size and magnitude where the specific retaining wall has been constructed successfully. Contact names and telephone numbers shall be listed for each project. 2. Contractor shall provide evidence that the design engineer has a minimum of five years of documented design in the design for SRW systems. The design engineer shall provide proof of current professional insurance with an aggregate coverage limit of not less that $1,000,000. B. Design Standard: I 1. The design analysis for the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer shall consider the external stability against sliding and overturning, internal stability, and facial stability of the reinforced soil mass and shall be in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and these specifications. 2. External stability analysis for bearing capacity, global stability, and total and differential settlement shall be the responsibility of the Owner and the Owner's I . Geotechnical Engineer. Geotechnical Engineer shall perform bearing capacity, settlement estimates, and global stability analysis based on the final wall design provided by the Wall Design Engineer and coordinate any required changes with Wall Design Engineer. 3. The geosynthetic placement in the wall design shall have 100 percent continuous coverage parallel to the wall face. Gapping between horizontally adjacent layers of geosynthetic (partial coverage) will not be allowed. 4. Soil Parameters: a. Soil Bearing Pressure: 2,000 psf. b. See soils report. C. Permitting: The Contractor shall pay for licenses necessary for proper execution and I completion of the Work, inclusive of design built structural systems requiring separate permit fees. 1 D. Owner shall provide soil testing, review of the submitted design, and quality assurance observation during earthwork and wall construction. Owner's quality assurance program does not relieve the contractor of responsibility for wall performance. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System ' Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 I 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Design Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's product information with material specifications, fabrication standards, factory finish, and structural analysis. 2. Submit design drawings and structural calculations for fabricator designed system bearing the seal and signature of a professional Civil Engineer registered in the State of Oregon. 3. Submit certification that manufacturer has approved the installer for this installation. B. Permit: Provide copy of acquired permit from governing jurisdiction prior to installation. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Contractor shall check materials upon delivery to assure ery as e that specified type and grade of materials have been received and proper color and texture of SRW units have been received. B. Contractor shall prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials that may affix themselves, from coming in contact with materials. C. Contractor shall store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. D. Contractor shall protect materials from damage. Damaged materials shall not be incorporated into the retaining wall. ' PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCTS A. Segmental Retaining Wall Units 1. SRW units shall be machine formed, Portland Cement concrete blocks specifically designed for retaining wall application. SRW units approved for this project are: a. Lock & Load Retaining Walls Ltd 2. Finish: Split face 3. Size: 15.75 inches by 31.75 inches by 3.5 inches r 4. Batter: 1 horizontal unit, 10 vertical unit 5. Cap: As supplied by manufacturer. 6. SRW units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 3 1. I I interfere with the proper placing of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of the structure. Cracking or excessive chipping may be grounds for rejection. Units showing cracks longer than Y2 inch shall not be used within the wall. Units showing chips visible at a distance of 20 feet from the wall shall not be used within the wall. I 7. Concrete used to manufacture the SRW units shall have a minimum of 28 days compressive strength of 5,500 psi and a maximum absorption rate, by weight, or 8 percent as determined in accordance with ASTM C 140. Compressive strength test specimens shall conform to the saw -cut coupon provisions of ASTM C 140. B. Geosynthetic Reinforcement 1. Geosynthetic reinforcement shall consist of geogrids or geotextiles I manufactured as a soil reinforcement element. The manufacturers /suppliers of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall have demonstrated construction of similar size and type of SRW on previous projects. 2. Type, strength, and placement location of the reinforcing geosynthetic shall be as determined by the Wall Design Engineer, as shown on the final, P.E. sealed wall plans. C. Leveling Pad: Material for leveling pad shall consist of compacted sand, gravel, or combination thereof (USCS soil types GP, GW, SP, & SW) and shall be a minimum of 6 inches in depth. Lean concrete with a strength of 200 -300 psi and three inches thick maximum may also be used as a leveling pad material. The leveling pad shall extend laterally at least a distance of 6 inches from the toe and heal of the lowermost SRW unit. D. Drainage Aggregate: Angular, clean stone or granular fill meeting the following g g gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM D422. Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 1 3/4 inch 75 -100 No. 4 0 -60 No. 40 0 -50 No. 200 0 -5 E. Drainage Pipe 1 1. The drainage collection pipe shall be perforated or slotted PVC, or corrugated ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 4 I i HDPE pipe. The drainage pipe may be wrapped with a geotextile to function as a filter. 2. Drainage pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D 3034 and/or ASTM D 1248. F. Reinforced (Infill) Soil 1 1. The reinforced soil material shall be free of debris. Unless otherwise noted on the final, P.E. sealed, retaining wall plans prepared by the Wall Design Engineer, the reinforced material shall consist of the inorganic USCS soil types GP, GW, SW, SP, SM meeting the following gradation, as determined in accordance with ASTM D 422. Sieve Size Percent Passing 4 inch 100 1 No. 4 20 -100 No. 40 0 -60 No. 200 0 -35 2. The maximum particle size of poorly - graded gravels (GP) (no fines) should not exceed 3/4 inch unless expressly approved by the Wall Design Engineer and the long -term design strength (LTDS) of the geosynthetic is reduced to account for additional installation damage from particles larger than this maximum. 3. The plasticity of the fine fraction shall be less than 20. PART 3 - EXECUTION r 3.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Excavation: 1. Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the grading plans. Contractor shall take precautions to minimize over - excavation. Over - excavation shall be filled with compacted infill material, or as directed by the Geotechnical Engineer, at the Contractor's expense. 2. Contractor shall verify location of existing structures, trees, and utilities prior to excavation. Contractor shall ensure all surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. Excavation support, if required, is the responsibility of the Contractor. ' B. Foundation Preparation: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 5 r I I 1. Following the excavation, the foundation soil shall be examined by the ' Geotechnical Engineer to assure the actual foundation soil strength meets or exceeds the assumed design bearing strength. Soils not meeting the required strength shall be removed and replaced with infill soils, as directed by the I Geotechnical Engineer. 2. Foundation soil shall be proof rolled and compacted to 95 percent Proctor density and inspected by the Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement of leveling pad materials. C. Leveling Pad Construction: I 1. Leveling pad shall be placed on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plans with a minimum thickness of 6 inches. The leveling pad should extend laterally a least a distance of 6 inches from the toe and tel of the lower most SRW unit. 2. Granular leveling pad material shall be compacted to provide a firm, level bearing surface on which to place the first course of units. Well - graded sand can be used to smooth the top 1/2 to 1/4 inch of the leveling pad. Compaction will be with mechanical plate compactors to achieve 95 percent of maximum standard Proctor density. (ASTM D 698) D. SRW Unit Installation 1 1. All SRW units shall be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the final, P.E. sealed wall plans and details on the I construction plans or as directed by the Wall Design Engineer. The SRW units shall be installed in general accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The specifications and drawings 111 shall govern in any conflict between the two requirements. 2. Units shall be leveled side -to -side, front -to -rear and with adjacent units, and aligned to ensure intimate contact with the leveling pad. The base course is the most important to ensure accurate and acceptable results. No gaps shall be left between the front of adjacent units. Alignment may be done by means of a string line or offset from base line to the back of the units. 3. All excess debris shall be cleaned from top of units. I 4. Units shall be placed on the units below. Each panel shall be installed completely prior to installing horizontally adjacent panels. 5. Prior to placement of next course of panels, the level and alignment of I the units shall be checked and corrected, where needed. 6. Layout of curves and /or corners shall be installed in accordance with Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System I Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 the wall plan details or in general accordance with SRW manufacturer's installation guidelines. E. Geosynthetic Reinforcement Placement ' 1. All geosynthetic reinforcement shall be installed at the proper elevation and orientation as shown on the final, P.E. sealed retaining wall plan ' profiles and details or as directed by the Wall Design Engineer. 2. At the elevations shown on the final plans, (after the units, drainage material, and backfill have been placed to this elevation) the ' geosynthetic reinforcement shall be laid horizontally on compacted infill and on top of the concrete SRW units, to within one inch of the front face of the unit below. Embedment of the geosynthetic in the t SRW units shall be consistent with SRW manufacturer's recommendations. Correct orientation of the geosynthetic reinforcement shall be verified by the Contractor to be in accordance with the geosynthetic manufacturer's recommendations. The highest strength direction of the geosynthetic must be perpendicular to the ' wall face. 3. Geosynthetic reinforcement layers shall be one continuous piece for their entire embedment length. Splicing of the geosynthetic in the ' • design strength direction (perpendicular to the wall face) shall not be permitted. Along the length of the wall, horizontally adjacent sections of geosynthetic reinforcement shall be butted in a manner to assure 100 ' percent coverage parallel to the wall face. 4. Tracked construction equipment shall not be operated directly on the geosynthetic reinforcement. A minimum of 6 inches of backfill is required prior to operation of tracked vehicles over the geosynthetic. Turning should be kept to a minimum. Rubber -tired equipment may pass over the geosynthetic reinforcement at slow speeds (less than 5 mph). 5. The geosynthetic reinforcement shall be free of wrinkles prior to placement of soil fill. The nominal tension shall be applied to the reinforcement and secured in place with staples, stakes, or by hand tensioning until reinforcement is covered by six inches of fill. F. Drainage Materials ' 1. Drainage aggregate shall be installed to the line, grades, and sections shown on the final P.E. sealed retaining wall plans. Drainage aggregate shall be placed to the minimum thickness shown on the Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 7 1 . 1 i construction plans between and behind units (a minimum of one cubic foot for each exposed square foot of wall face unless otherwise noted ' on the final wall plans). 2. Drainage collection pipes shall be installed to maintain gravity flow of water outside the reinforced soil zone. The drainage collection pipe 111 shall daylight into a storm sewer or along a slope, at an elevation lower than the lowest point of the pipe within the aggregate drain. G. Backfill Placement 1. The reinforced backfill shall be placed as shown in the final wall plans ' in the maximum compacted lift thickness of 10 inches and shall be compacted to a minimum of 95% of standard Proctor density (ASTM D 698) at a moisture content within 2% of optimum. The backfill shall be placed and spread in such a manner as to eliminate wrinkles or movement of the geosynthetic reinforcement and the SRW units. I 2. Only hand - operated compaction equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet of the back of the wall units. Compaction within the 3 feet behind the wall units shall be achieved by at least three (3) passes of a lightweight mechanical tamper, plate, or roller. 3. At the end of each day's operation, the Contractor shall slope the last level of backfill away from the wall facing and reinforced backfill to direct water runoff away from the wall face. 4.. At completion of wall construction, backfill shall be placed level with final top of wall elevation. If final grading, paving, landscaping, and /or storm drainage installation adjacent to the wall is not placed immediately after wall completion, temporary grading and drainage shall be provided to ensure water runoff is not directed at the wall nor allowed to collect or pond behind the wall until final construction adjacent to the wall is completed. I H. SRW Caps 1: SRW caps shall be properly aligned and glued to underlying 8n g yang units with adhesive, a flexible, high - strength concrete adhesive. Rigid adhesive or mortar are not acceptable. 2. Caps shall overhang the top course of units by 3/4 to 1 inch. Slight variation in overhang is allowed to correct alignment at the top of the wall. • I. Construction Adjacent to Completed Wall , Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 8 1 1 ' 1. The General Contractor is responsible for ensuring that construction by others adjacent to the wall does not disturb the wall or place temporary construction loads on the wall that exceed design loads, including loads such as water pressure, temporary grades, or equipment loading. Heavy paving or grading equipment shall be kept a minimum of three feet behind the back of the wall face. Equipment with wheel loads in ' excess of 150 psf live load shall not be operated within 10 feet of the face of the retaining wall during construction adjacent to the wall. Care should be taken by the General Contractor to ensure water runoff is directed away from the wall structure until final grading and surface drainage collection systems are completed. "END OF SECTION" 1 i i 1 1 1 I 1 1 _ Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02830 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Segmented Retaining Wall System Project Number 106244 Page 9 I 02900 LANDSCAPE Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C. It is solely the product of Clifford Design. ' PART 1— GENERAL ' 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Section includes: 1. Provide labor, materials and equipment for the preparation and installation of topsoil, soil amendments, planting and mulching. 1 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS ' A. Irrigation - See Section 02810 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. The Project Manager supervising the landscape installation shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in landscape construction and be on -site during installation. B. Trees, Shrubs and Plants: 1. Provide quantity, size, species and variety as specified on plans. Comply with recommendation and requirements of ANSI Z 60.1. 2. Provide healthy, vigorous stock, grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project, free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, defects such as knots, sun- scald, injuries and abrasions or disfigurements. 3. Where there is a formal or consecutive order of trees or shrubs as shown on the plan, select quality plant stock for uniform height and spread. C. Availability of Materials 1. When specified landscape materials are not obtainable due to availability, submit 1 proof of non - availability and a written proposal for use of equivalent materials within thirty days after date of construction contract. I 2. Trees and shrubs of larger size than specified may be used if acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Root ball sizes should increase proportionately. Smaller size ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02900 1 Mildren Design Group. PC Landscape ' Project Number 106244 1 I containers or a reduced tree height cannot be substituted for size specified on plans unless notification to the Landscape Architect is provided of non - availability. The I reduced size may or may not be accepted. Additional plants may be required to address the size reduction. Some size requirements may be out of Architects control due to city and county design guidelines. I D. Analysis and Standards: The packaging of products used during the installation, such as fertilizers, gypsum I and lime shall include the manufacturer's certified analysis on the outside label. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Deliver packaged materials in manufacturer's unopened containers, fully identified 1 by name, brand, type, weight, and analysis. B. Deliver trees, shrubs and ground covers after preparations for planting have been I completed and the irrigation system is fully operational. 1. Provide freshly dug trees and shrubs I 2. Protect trunks and branches from damage. 3. Protect root systems from drying out. I 4. Do not remove container grown stock from containers until planting time. I 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Execute work in an orderly and careful manner with due consideration for surrounding areas, plantings or structures. Protect adjacent property and site improvements from work damage including staining, soiling, or discoloring. g I B. Notify Project Manager of any unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with work only after conditions have been corrected. C. Identify location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will I avoid possible damage. Be aware of any overhead lines when operating heavy equipment. Provide adequate protection for all utilities and site features. 1.06 WARRANTY I A. Remove and replace trees, shrubs and ground cover that have died, have shown I unsatisfactory growth or are in an unhealthy condition. 2 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02900 Mildren Design Group. PC Landscape Project Number 106244 I I I B. Furnish lant replacements which comply with requirements P P p y q rements shown on the drawings or specifications. 1 1.07 MAINTENANCE I A. During period between initial planting and substantial completion, provide fertilizer, weeding, spraying, resetting of unstable plants and other maintenance to I assure healthy growth. Observe water distribution to each plant and correct any problems that limit adequate water supply to the plant or the over saturation around the plants root ball. I B. Protect all landscape work and materials from damage by other contractors or trades during and after project completion until final acceptance of landscape and irrigation work by owner or owner's representative. 1 1.08 MATERIALS I A. Topsoil — imported or on -site soil: 1. Provide topsoil to all landscape areas with fertile, sandy loam surface soil, free of I subsoil, clay lumps or clods of hard earth, brush, weeds, stumps, roots, other litter, sticks, stones larger than 1 '/2 inches in any dimension or other extraneous material of toxic matter harmful to plant growth. 1 2. Remove debris, rock, gravel, clods and other undesirable materials, whether discovered before or after placement. I 3. Topsoil placement to be a minimum depth of six inches 6" with additional to inches ( 6") topsoil placement in areas as needed to meet finish grade. I B. Plants: I 1. Provide sufficient plants to complete work as shown on drawings. Should a discrepancy exist between plant list quantities and the drawings, the drawings shall govern. I 2. Provide plants free of disease, injury and insect infestation. 3. Container grown deciduous trees and shrubs will be acceptable instead of balled and burlapped subject to specified limitations of ANSI Z 60.1 for container stock. 4. Provide trees of the height and caliper scheduled or shown, with the branching I configuration recommended by ANSI Z 60.1 for the type and size required. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02900 3 Mildren Design Group. PC Landscape I Project Number 106244 I C. Tree Staking: 1. Provide tree stakes for deciduous trees. Vertical stakes of 2 "x2 "x8' Fir or Hemlock. Use "Gro- Straight" or equal tree ties with 12 gage galvanized iron wire. 2. Provide tree guying material for conifers over 4" caliper in size. Use 2 "x2 "x2' tree stakes. Use "Gro- Straight or equal tree ties with 12 gage galvanized iron wire. D. Mulch: 1. Medium to fine ground Douglas Fir or Hemlock bark mulch. Provide in plant beds and around trees in lawn area. Provide a minimum depth of two inches (2 ") mulch over entire planting beds and mulch rings at base of trees inside lawn areas. , 1.09 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Upon completion, the Owner or Owners Representative will inspect the site to determine if Substantial Completion has been reached. Begin maintenance program once plants and trees are installed and continue maintenance throughout the warranty period. END OF SECTION 1 i I I i I 4 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 02900 Mildren Design Group. PC Landscape Project Number 106244 03100 ' CONCRETE FORMWORK Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI Engineering. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Forms for footings and foundation walls. ' 2. Forms for curbs and walks. 3. Formwork accessories including expansion and control joints. ' 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Design of formwork is the Contractor's responsibility. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION i A. Structural and Dimensional Requirements 1. Design formwork and shoring to support structural loads, hold concrete in correct size, and alignment and meet tolerances indicated in Paragraphs 3.3.1 and 3.3.8 in ACI 347 and Table 4.3.1 in ACI 301. 2. Comply with all pertinent provisions of ACI 318 -02, Chapter 6. Building Code requirements for reinforced concrete: Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. ' 3. Construct formwork to plumb and level within 1/4" in 10'. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Flat Concealed Smooth Concrete: 1. Form Materials: At the discretion of the General Contractor. 2.2 FORMWORK COMPONENTS A. Form Materials: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center ec S rion 03100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Concrete Formwork ' Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1. Wood Forms: ' a. Dimensional S4S lumber. b. 3/4" BB Class I or II Exterior APA Plyform. 2. Steel Forms: May be used at Contractor's option. I 3. Earth Forms: Side forms of footings may be omitted and concrete placed directly against excavation only when requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect. When omission of forms is accepted, provide additional 1" concrete on each side of minimum design profiles and dimensions shown. 4. Form Ties: Provide factory- fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap -off metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. 5. Form Coatings: Provide commercial formulation form - coating compounds that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces requiring bond or adhesion, or impede the wetting of surfaces to be cured with water or curing compounds. 6. Chamfer strip: Beveled, 45 degrees, 3/4" wide. B. Concrete Joint Forms: 1. Exterior expansion and isolation joint fillers: Asphalt saturated cane fiber, 1/2" thick, ASTM D 1751. C. Waterstops: Swellstop by Greenstreat PART 3- EXECUTION I 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Site Fabrication of Formwork: 1. Fabricate formwork to comply with requirements in ACI 301 and ACI 347. ' 2. Fabricate corners and intersections flush without visible offsets. 3. Fabricate, camber, and reinforce forms to meet 1/4" in 10' maximum deflection. 4. Fabricate solid blocking behind formwork panel joints. 5. Fabricate shoring for concrete forms with deflection adjustments. B. Fabrication of Cleanouts: 1. Fabricate temporary cleanouts at inaccessible areas for cleanout and , inspection prior to concrete placement. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Formwork Project Number 106244 Page 2 2. Locate cleanouts in areas where concrete will be concealed. ' C. Installation of Items Embedded in Concrete: ' 1. Install anchor bolts for preservative treated wood sills. 2. Install anchor bolts for structural framing members and equipment. 3. Set formwork anchorage and insert devices for materials that are attached ' to or supported by cast -in -place concrete. 4. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions furnished by product manufacturers for locating and setting anchorage and insert devices. ' 5. Install steel pipe sleeves for penetrating pipe lines where pipe is 3" in diameter or larger. ' D. Installation of Formwork Accessory Materials: ' 1. Apply form coating and form release agent to form surfaces which will be in contact with fresh concrete. 2. Install chamfer strip at exposed concrete external vertical corners. ' 3. Install chamfer strip at exposed external corners. 4. Unexposed external corners may be square or chamfered. 5. Bevel or kerf wood inserts built into form recesses to assure easy removal after concrete placement. E. Installation of Formwork Joint Materials: ' 1. Install construction joints in locations which will not impair the strength p gt and appearance of the concrete work. 2. Install construction and control joints in interior floor slabs per structural plans. ' 3. Install expansion joints in interior concrete floor slabs on grade at locations indicated. F. Site Fabrication of Shoring: 1. Fabricate shoring to safely support concrete forms without excessive stress ' or deflection. 2. Install wedges or jacks to allow adjustment of shoring before and during concrete placement. ' 3. Provide camber in formwork as required for anticipated deflections due to weight and pressures of fresh concrete and construction loads for long span members without intermediate supports. 4. Keep shores in place until the concrete has attained its required strength and heavy loads due to construction operations have been removed. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 03100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ _ Concrete Formwork ' Project Number 106244 Page 3 i 5. Remove shoring in a planned sequence to avoid damage to new concrete. G. Application of Form Coatings: 1. Coat wood and plywood formwork concrete contact surfaces with form coating. 2. Coat formwork concrete contact surfaces with nonstaining form release agent before reinforcement is placed. 3. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 COMPLETION ' A. Adjusting Formwork During and After Concrete Placement: , 1. Retighten forms immediately after concrete placement where required to eliminate mortar leaks and prevent excessive deflection. 2. Inspect formwork to check for abnormal deflection or signs of structural failure. 3. Adjust formwork to meet required concrete dimensions. ' B. Daily Cleaning: 1. Clean interior form surfaces prior to concrete P lacement. C. Formwork Removal: , 1. Forms to remain in place until concrete can safely support its own weight and load thereon. 2. Contractor is responsible for form removal and any resulting concrete damage. Repair or replace damaged concrete as directed at no additional cost to Owner. D. Reuse of Forms: ' 1. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form - facing material will not be acceptable. 2. Apply new form coating compound material to concrete contact surfaces as specified for new formwork. 3. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, clean concrete and form surfaces and tighten forms to close joints. E. Patching and Repairing: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Formwork Project Number 106244 Page 4 I I I 1. After form removal, fill form holes with cement mortar mixed as dry as feasible and rammed solid. 2. Repair voids and rock pockets. I 3. Remove fins off smooth and patch imperfections to match adjacent surfaces. 4. Remove telegraphed lines, sack finish and grind smooth. I 5. Rub rough surfaces with carborundum stone where directed. "SECTION END" I I I I I - I I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Formwork I Project Number 106244 Page 5 1 03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineering. PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: ' 1. Steel required for reinforcement of cast -in -place concrete. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. The term "reinforcement" as used herein, includes all reinforcement needed for concrete indicated on the Drawings or required for a complete operable facility. Reinforce all concrete unless specifically noted on the drawings. If no reinforcement is shown, contact Architect for requirements. 2. Contractor is responsible for reinforcing supports. t 3. Contractor is responsible for design of reinforcing for tilt -up and precast concrete to resist lifting and erecting loads. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Standards: 1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice" ' 2. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, Commentary on Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. ASTM A615 and Supplement #1. ' 4. ASTM A82, Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement. 5. Deliver reinforcement to the job site bundled, tagged, and marked. Tags to indicate bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to ' markings shown on placement diagrams. 6. Store reinforcement at the job site in a manner to prevent damage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. I SUBMITTAL 1 SU L A Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03200 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Reinforcement Project Number 106244 Page 1 .1 A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit steel reinforcing placement prior drawings rior to fabrication of reinforcing. 2. Comply with requirements in ACI 315. ' 3. Identify and dimension each type of reinforcing bar. B. Test Reports: Submit two copies of mill test reports on grade 60 reinforcing prior to placing concrete. C. Inspection: Notify Architect /Engineer 48 hours prior to concrete pour for inspection of reinforcing. PART 2- PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing: 1. Reinforcing: Bars shall be deformed, intermediate grade steel conforming ' with "Specifications for Billet -Steel Concrete Reinforcing Bars ", ASTM A615, Grade 60 unless specifically noted as grade 40. 2. Weld Type Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706, Grade 60. B. Reinforcing Accessories: 1. Chairs, Spacers, and Hangers: PVC protected steel, nylon or nylon coated. 2. Reinforcing Tie Wire: ASTM A 82, 16 gauge, double annealed iron wire. 2.2 FABRICATION ' A. Shop Fabrication of Steel Reinforcing: 1. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1, ACI 301, ACI 315, and ACI 318. 2. Comply with ACI 318, Chapter 7 for bending dimension. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE ORNLANCE A. Installation of Reinforcing Steel: ' 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03200 . Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Reinforcement Project Number 106244 Page 2 1. Comply with CRSI, Manual of Standard Practice, MSP -1. ' 2. Support reinforcing to prevent displacement with metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers. 3. Set wires so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete ' surfaces. 4. Stagger reinforcing bar splices 36" minimum at alternate bars. 5. Lap continuous bars in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 12, Class B, ' unless noted otherwise. 6. Placement tolerance not to exceed 1/4" plus or minus. 7. Construct hooked reinforcing to comply with ACI 318, Section 7.1 to 7.3. ' 8. Notify Architect of items interfering such as conduit, pipes, inserts, sleeves, etc., and obtain written approval on procedure before placement ' on concrete is started. B. Minimum Concrete Cover for Reinforcing Bars: Comply with ACI 318, ' Chapter 7, Paragraph 7.7, unless otherwise noted. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Reinforcing: Adjust location of reinforcing as required by Engineer prior to concrete placement. B. Cleaning Reinforcing: Remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, g g rt ,and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. l "SECTION END" i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 03200 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Concrete Reinforcement Project Number 106244 Page 3 • 1 03300 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineering. PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY i A. Section Includes: ' 1. Site cast concrete for footings, foundation walls and floor slabs on grade. 2. Finishing, hardening, and curing site cast concrete. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Protect concrete from frost damage until protected by soil backfill or 1 until cured for 28 days. 2. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures below 45 degrees F. during curing period. 1 3. Comply with recommendations in ACI 306R. 1 B. Hot Weather Protection: 1. Protect concrete from shrinkage crack damage until protected by 1 2. curing procedure. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures above 75 degrees F. during curing period. 3. Comply with recommendations in ACI 305R. C. Pour Documentation: ' 1. Provide pour slip -trip ticket with each load of concrete. 2. Provide pour slip information : 1 a. Mix design number. b. Strength. c. Add mixtures and amount. ' d. Slump sent out from concrete supplier. e. Size of aggregate. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 1 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cast -In -Place Concrete Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 f. Truck number. g. Slip number. h. Load number. D. Testing 1. Owner will employ and pay for services of Independent Testing Laboratory, working under direction of Architect, to perform concrete test. 2. Contractor shall cooperate and furnish tools, materials, and assistance. 1.3 SUBMITTAL ' A. Mix Design: 1. Prepare design mixes for each type of concrete. 2. Proportion mixes by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods, using materials to be employed on the work for each class of concrete required but not less than 5 -1/2 sack mix for concrete with strength greater than 2,500 psi. 3. Furnish certified reports of each proposed mix for each type of concrete at least 14 days prior to delivery of concrete to the site. 4. Submit two copies of Laboratory and Field Test Reports for concrete work. 1.4 STANDARDS ' A. Concrete Strengths: 1. Footings, : fc = 3,000 psi at 28 days with 3" slump. Slump tolerances plus or minus 1 ". 2. Floor Slabs: f'c = 3,500 psi at 28 days, with 3" slump. Slump tolerance ' plus or minus 1 ". B. Minimum Standards: 1. ACI 301, ACI 305, and ACI 306. 2. ASTM C 94 -86, ASTM C 150, ASTM C 260, ASTM C 494, and ASTM C 33. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Cast -In -Place Concrete Project Number 106244 Page 2 A. Temperature and Weather Requirements: 1. Do not place concrete when temperature or weather will affect the performance or appearance of concrete. ' 2. Apply epoxy bonding agents between 40 and 85 degrees F. 3. Ambient air temperature not less than 40 degrees F. 4. No precipitation expected within 8 hours of unprotected exposed ' concrete surfaces. 5. Maximum 15 mph wind velocity for unprotected floor slabs, walks, and curbs. B. Substrate Requirements: ' 1. Do not place concrete on dry, soft, muddy, or frozen subgrade. 2. Remove ice and standing water from footing trenches and formed surfaces. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement, Aggregates, and Water: 1. Standard Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II at Contractor's option, with maximum total alkalies not to exceed 0.80 % (Na20 + 0.658K20). 2. Standard Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and ACI 318, Section 3.3. ' 3. Water: Clean, potable, fresh, and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, organic materials, or other harmful substances. ' B. Cement Admixtures: 1. Air Entraining Agent: ASTM C 260 a. Slabs exposed to weather to have 6 % + / -1% air entrainment. 2. Water Reducing Agent: ASTM C 494, Type A3, calcium chloride content not to exceed 1 -1/2 % of the weight of cement. ' 3. Fly ash not to exceed 15% of total cementitous material. C. Water Reducing Admixtures: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 494, Type � YP e A. 2. Acceptable Admixtures: Pozzolith Polyheed by Master Builders. ' D. Water Based Acrylic ry c Curing Compound: Pacific Crossroads Corporate rp a Center Section 03300 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ _ Cast -In -Place Concrete Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Clear. 2. Acceptable Compounds: Safe Cure & Seal, J -19 by Dayton Superior. E. Sodium Silicate Cure and Hardeners: Day Chem Sil -Cure J -13 by Dayton ' Superior. F. Moisture Retaining Membranes: ' 1. Polyethylene: ASTM D2103, Clear or white, 6 mils thick. 2. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Pedestrian Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Orange Label Sisalkraft by Fortifiber Corp. 3. Reinforced Laminated Paper for Non - Traffic Areas: ASTM C 171, Sisalkraft SK -10 by Fortifiber Corp. 2.2 MIXES ' A. Proportioning: 1. Comply with ACI 211.1 and IBC Section 1905. 2. Proportion concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Article 3.8. 3. (Optional) Add water reducing admixtures at rate prescribed by manufacturer. B. Proportion Adjustments: 1. Mix designs may be adjusted when material characteristics, site conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant a revised mix design. 2. Do not use revised concrete mixes until submitted to and review by Architect /Engineer. C. Mixing Procedures: 1 1. Comply with ASTM C 94. 2. Mix full load for 3 minutes at high speed upon arrival at site. 3. Mix additional 5 minutes after adding any water. D. Mix Requirements: 1. Foundations /Footings /Retaining Walls /Slabs on Grade: a. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inch. 2. Composite Floor Slabs: 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cast -In -Place Concrete Project Number 106244 Page 4 I I a. Maximum Coarse Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch. I 3. Entrained Air for Exterior Horizontal Surfaces: 6% plus or minus 1 %. 4. Probability of Test Falling Below Specified Strength: One out of five. 5. Minimum Portland Cement Content: 517 pounds per cubic yard. I 6. Water Reducing Admixture: Contractor's option, Type A or D. E. Spalled Concrete Repair: Burke Epoxy Reflex Joint Filler. I PART 3- EXECUTION I . 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Notify Independent Testing Laboratory 24 hours prior to placing I 2. concrete. Do not place concrete until Architect /Engineer or a reprensentative of the Independent Testing Laboratory has examined the formwork I and reinforcing steel. 3. Do not place concrete in footing forms until Soils Engineer has examined the compacted soil and aggregate base materials within the I forms,. I B. Protection: Coat aluminum embedded in concrete prior to concrete placement. I . C. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean forms, expansion joint fillers, and embedded items. I 2. Adjust location and anchorage of formwork reinforcing support items, and reinforcing steel. 3. Drill holes in existing concrete for grouted dowels at 3/8" in diameter I larger than reinforcing dowels. D. Cleaning for Epoxy Grouted Dowels: I 1. Blow holes out with oil free compressed air. 2. Remove moisture, rust, oil, grease, protective coatings, and I galvanizing from dowels in accordance with grout manufacturer's instructions. I E. Concrete Placement: I Pacific sroads Cros Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Cast -In -Place Concrete - 1 .. Project Number 106244 Page 5 1 • I 1. Place concrete in compliance with practices and recommendation of ACI 301, and herein specified. I 2. Handle from mixer for final deposit rapidly by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients to maintain required quality of concrete. I 3. Deposit concrete continuously. When continuous placement is not possible, construction joints shall be located as approved by the Architect. I 4. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as possible to its final position, avoid rehandling or flowing. I 5. Place in forms within 1 -1/2 hours after introduction of water. 6. Use of partially hardened or contaminated concrete prohibited. 7. Backfill utility line trenches below continuous footings with concrete. I F. Consolidation: 1. Consolidate by vibration, spading, rodding, or forking. Work I concrete around reinforcement, embedded items, and into corners. 2. Eliminate all air or stone pockets and other causes of honeycombing, I pitting or planes or weakness. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete. 4. Do not vibrate forms or reinforcement. • I 3.2 FINISHING VERTICAL SURFACES I A. Finishing Concealed Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 1. Provide rough form finish for concrete not exposed to public view. I 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 10.2.1. 3. Remove fins and projection exceeding 1/4" in height. I 4. Patch tie holes and surface defects. B. Finishing Exposed Vertical Concrete Surfaces: I 1. Provide smooth form finish for concrete exposed to public view. 2. Comply with ACI 301, paragraph 10.2.2. 3. Remove fins and projections. 4. Patch tie holes and surface defects. I 5. Provide smooth rubbed finish for exposed curbs, walls, and columns, complying with ACI 301, paragraph 10.3.1. 6. Within 24 hours after form removal, wet and rub exposed curbs, I soffits, and columns with carborundum brick or other abrasive material until uniform color and texture are protected. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cast -In -Place Concrete I Project Number 106244 Page 6 I 1 :. I 3.3. ''F INISHING HORIZONTAL ONTALCONCRETE SURFACES . A. Slab finishing: " . . 1. Provide troweled finish for interior . slab .surfaces that are to be . exposed to view, or, are to receive resilient or carpet coverings, I complying with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.3. • _ -2. Provide a broom finish to exterior concrete walks; slabs, and ramps complying with ACI 301, paragraph 11.7.4. . B. Troweled lab Finishing S is mg Procedures 1 . Provide a floated slab surface as specified above. 2. Power trowel slab to smooth surface free of defects except minor I trowel marks. 3. Eliminate trowel marks by hand- troweling slab when ' surface is • sufficiently hard. gi 4. Perform final hand troweling when trowel rings as the trowel is moved over the, slab surface. . _ 5. Trowel to overall tolerance of F /F Minimum tolerance I permitted is F /FL10. Contractor to remove and replace all defective sections. C. Horizontal Concrete Finishing Requirement:. 1. Tool radius exterior slab, walk, ramp, and curb exposed edges. I . 2. Control Joints: Sawcut in locations indicated. Sawcut 1/8 inch wide by 1/4 inch slab thickness. ' Acco'mplish sawcuts after finishing Operations - are complete and as soon as concrete is strong enough not _ to unravel the edges of the sawcut, but before random cracking has . occured. I 3. Finish concrete horizontal surfaces to ' tolerances specified in Articles 11.7, 11.8, 11.9 in ACI 301. , 3.4 CURING AND HARDENING. • . . A. - Curing Procedures: . 1. Comply with recommendations in•A CI p y C 308. 2: Cover exposed surfaces and keep concrete and form surfaces wet for I . . 48 hours minimum. . 3. Apply cure /hardener immediately' after final set and /or final 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Cast -In -Place Concrete I - Project Number 106244 ` . Page 7 I I finishing to the point of saturation and surface accumulation. Keep entire area treated with cure /hardener wet for a minimum of 30 I minutes by respraying any dry spots that may appear. After the 30 minutes have passed, begin spreading out puddles with a squeegee or broom. Lightly mist the treated area with water. As the surface begins to dry again, thoroughly rinse the entire treated area with water and vacuum or squeegee off the excess to prevent any residual staining. I 4. Temperatures during application should be no less than 32 degrees F and no greater than 100 degrees F. 5. Apply cure /hardener by low pressure sprayer, roller, mop, brush, stiff bristle broom or by flood and squeegee at manufacturer's recommended rate but not less than 150 square feet per gallon. I 3.5 COMPLETION A. Field Test Requirements: • 1. When required by the Building Code, Section 306, Special Inspection Requirements, Owner will employ an Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate site cast concrete. 2. Comply with Building Code, Section 2604 (h) for evaluation and I acceptance of concrete. - 3. - Test one cured cylinder prior to removing shoring under structural concrete. B. Surface Repairs for Exposed Concrete Vertical Surfaces: I 1. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water and brush -coat the area to be • patched with bonding agent. I 2. Fill honeycomb voids and rock pockets with patching compound. 3. Compact in place and screed as recommended . by patching • compound manufacturer. I 4. Finish exposed concrete surfaces to match adjoining work. 5. Strike off excess mortar at surface. 6. If defects in color and texture of surface cannot be repaired, remove III and replace the concrete. C. Surface Repairs for Interior Concrete Floor Slabs: Grind or fill interior floor I slab surfaces until defects do not show through the intended floor covering. D. Spalled Interior Concrete Floor Slab Repair: I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cast -In -Place Concrete 1 Project Number 106244 Page 8 I I 1. Sandblast or wirebrush joints or loose areas. Area must be clean and I free of curing compound, sealers, loose material, and any other foreign substances. 2. Immediately prior to applying epoxy, remove any water and dust I from all surfaces with an oil -free air blast. 3. Use fine sand to plug shrinkage cracks in the bottom of the joint allowing at least a 1 inch full depth pour. I 4. Application: a. Apply epoxy with either a caulking gun or pour from a I suitable container. The filled joint must be flush with the floor. Or: b. Overfill joint and one tack -free, grind or cut flush to surface of 1 concrete with a razor knife. 5. Install epoxy no earlier than 60 days after concrete has been placed. I ' E. Daily Cleaning: Remove concrete spills and splatters from adjacent finished surfaces. I F. Physical Barrier Protection: 1. Barricade area containing fresh concrete slabs, and walks for 24 hours I minimum. 2. Cover fresh concrete with 1/2" thick plywood or oriented strand board for 48 hours minimum where exposed to public and pedestrian I traffic. I G. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Protect concrete from frost damage until protected by soil backfill or I until cured for 28 days. 2. • Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures below 45 degrees F. during curing period. 1 3. Comply with recommendations in ACI 306R. H. Hot Weather Protection: I 1. Protect concrete from shrinkage crack damage until rotected b P by curing procedure. I ' 2. Protect concrete from physical damage or reduced strength caused by air temperatures above 75 degrees F. during curing period. I 3. Comply with recommendations in ACI 305R. SECTION END" I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03300 I Mildren Design Group, P.C. Cast -In -Place Concrete Project Number 106244 Page 9 r r 03310 ' UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER/RETARDER PART 1 - GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY A. Products Supplied Under This Section: 1. Vapor Barrier. 2. Seam Tape. 3. Mastic. 4. Pipe Boots. 5. Detail Strip for installation under concrete slabs. 1.2 REFERENCES A American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 1745 -97 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact With Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E 154 -88 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact With Earth Under Concrete Slabs. 3. ASTM E 96 -95 Standard test methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 4. ASTM E 1643 -98 Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. r B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): I 1. ACI 302.1R -96 Vapor Barrier Component (plastic membrane) is not less than 10 mils thick. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. PRODUCT DATA 1. Independent laboratory test results showing compliance with ASTM and ACI Standards. 2. Manufacturer's samples, literature. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming, and pipe boot installation. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03310 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Under Slab Vapor Barrier /Retarder Project Number 106244 Page 1 • r I r PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Vapor Retarder Requirements: 1. Vapor retarder membrane must have the following qualities: a. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: ASTM E 96, 0.04 perms or lower. b. Water Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Meets or exceeds Class C. c. Thickness of Retarder: ACI 302.1R -96, Not less than 10 mils. B. Manufacturer: 1. Stego Wrap, 10 mil vapor retarder by Stego Industries LLC. ,I 2. Grifolyn T -85 by Reef Industries. 3. Moistop Ultra by Fortifiber Industries. I C. Accessories: 1. Seam Tape: Stego Tape by Stego Industries, LLC. 2. Vapor Proofing Mastic:Stego Mastic 3. Pipe Boots: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material, pressure sensitive tape and /or mastic per_manufacturer's instructions. PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ensure that subsoil is approved by the Geotechnical Engineer. Y guieer. 3.2 INSTALLATION I, A. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E 1643 -98. 1. Install vapor barrier /retarder directly on approved slab grade. 2. Unroll vapor barrier /retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour. 3. Lap vapor barrier /retarder past pour strip by minimum of 2 feet. 4. Prior to completing pour strip, lap new vapor barrier /retarder a minimum of 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape, extend to tilt -up concrete wall and extend above finish floor elevation. After pour strip has been poured remove I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03310 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Under Slab Vapor Barrier /Retarder I Project Number 106244 Page 2 I 1 1 excess material above finish floor elevation. 5. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. 6. Seal all penetrations (including pipes) per manufacturer's instructions. 7. No penetration of the vapor barrier /retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 8. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier /retarder, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all four sides with tape. "END OF SECTION" 1 1 r 1 11_ I I 1 I 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03310 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Under Slab Vapor Barrier /Retarder Project Number 106244 Page 3 i I 03600 GROUT Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: ' 1. Non - shrink non - metallic grout. 2. Epoxy grout. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information. ' B. Test Reports: Submit two copies of building code required laboratory and field test reports for structural grout work. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Follow o recommended practices of the Oregon Structural Specialty Code, ' latest edition. 2. Manufacturer's representative shall provide technical assistance to ensure that all work in this section is executed in accordance with manufacturer's ' recommendations. 3. Do not place grout unless temperature of materials is a minimum of 40 degrees F. for three days prior to installation. 4. Do not apply grout on dirty wet, or frozen substrates. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS A. Non - Shrink; Cementitious, No- Metallic Grout: 1. Type: Premixed, packaged, shrink resistant, nonstaining, and Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03600 ' . Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Grout Project Number 106244 Page 1 I noncorrosive. 2. Industry Standard: ASTM C 1107, CRD C-621. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: fc = 5,000 psi in 28 days. 4. Shrinkage: Shows positive expansion when tested by ASTM C 827. B. Epoxy Adhesive /Grout: 1. Type: Premixed, packaged, two component, epoxy resin. U 2. Industry Standard: ASTM C 881. 3. Minimum Compressive Strength: f'c = 5,000 psi in 28 days. 4. Acceptabe Adhesives: Sikadur 32 Hi -Mod by Sika; Bond -1 by Permagile Industries; Concressive Liquid (LPL) by Master Builders. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 PERFORMANCE I A. Preparation: Remove loose aggregate and other deleterious materials prior to placing grout and anchoring cement. I B. Installation of Grout Below Bearing Plates: 1. Support bearing plates above cleaned bearing g p g surfaces with double nutted anchor bolts or wedges. 2. Fill space below bearing plates supporting structural members and stationary equipment with nonmetallic grout. 3. Fill space below bearing plates supporting vibrating equipment with metallic non - catalyzed grout. C. Installation of Grout in Steel Door and Relite Frames: Install nonmetallic grout inside door and relite frames in concrete walls. D. Installation of Grout in Steel Bollards: I 1. Fill steel bollards with non - metallic grout. 2. Smooth trowel grout to pitch at top of bollard. I E. Installation of Anchor Bolts with Anchoring Cement: 1. Set anchor bolts for structural plates with anchor bolts double nutted to 1/2 inch thich CDX plywood or oriented strand board templates. 2. Set anchor bolts for equipment double nutted to templates furnished by equipment manufacturer. 3. Fill around anchor bolts with anchoring cement as recommended by i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 03600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Grout Project Number 106244 Page 2 f anchoring cement manufacturer. ' F. Installation of Grout at Concrete Reinforcing and Anchor Bolts: Set anchor bolts and reinforcing steel with epoxy grout as recommended by manufacturer. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Grout Testing: 1. When required by the Building Code, Section 1704, Special Inspection ' Requirements, Owner will employ Independent Testing Laboratory to evaluate grout supporting structural members. ' 2. Comply with requirements and procedures in Section 01400, Quality Control. 3. Test nonmetallic nonshrink grout in accordance with ASTM C 109. 4. Test epoxy grout in accordance with ASTM C 579, Method B. B. Manufacturer's Field service: Grout and anchoring cement manufacturer's R representative shall provide technical assistance and one minimum project site visit to ensure that grout and anchoring cement work is performed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Adjusting Defective Work: Replace or patch defective rout and arichorin g g cement work. D. Physical Barrier Protection: 1. Cover fresh grout and anchoring cement for 24 hours minimum. 2. Cover fresh grout and anchoring cement with plywood or oriented strand board where exposed to public and pedestrian traffic. "SECTION END" I 1 I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center ter Section 03600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Grout Project Number 106244 Page 3 • ' 04210 CLAY UNIT MASONRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1 1. Brick veneer masonry. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 A. Design Requirements: 1. Minimum masonry wall Design Strength: m =1,5 0 psi 2. Maximum Brick Efflorescence: None i 1.3 SUBMITTALS I ' A. Product Data: _ 1. Submit product data on veneer anchors and control joints. 2. Submit product data on concealed flashing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings for masonry reinforcing steel prior to placement. Indicate size of each reinforcing bar. C. Samples: 1. Submit three samples of each type of face brick and hollow clay masonry units to indicate manufacturer's standard variation in color and texture. 2. Submit two 12 inch long by 'A inch wide tooled samples of color tinted mortar. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Samples: 1. Install ten square feet of each type of masonry unit. 2. Acceptable field samples may be incorporated in the Work. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 I B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. I 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Temperature and Moisture Requirements: 1. Protect masonry units and mortar from excessive moisture during installation. , 2. Do not install masonry units when temperature falls below 40 degrees F or rises above 90 degrees F. i PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 BRICK MASONRY MATERIALS I A. Face Brick: . I 1. Product Data: ASTM C 216, Grade SW, Type FBA. 2. Size: 2 -1/2 and 3 -1/2 by 3 -1/2 by 7 -1/2 inches. I 3. Color: a. B -1: (Blend) 20 percent `Vintage ", 50 percent Imperial Red and 30 percent Burgundy b. B -2: Vintage 4. Texture: a. B -1 Blend: Smooth on exposed faces of field brick. b. B -2: Mission Texture on exposed faces of field brick. 5. Unit Shapes: Standard and special shapes as indicated on Drawings. 6. Provide bricks without cores or other voids at projected brick and at those courses of field brick immediately above and below courses of recessed brick, and at parapet ends. 7. Acceptable Face Brick: Mutual Materials or approved substitution. 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Mortar and Grout Materials: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 2. Masonry Cement: ASTM D 91. 3. Hydrated Lime: ASTM D 207, Type S. 1 4. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144. 5. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404, Size No. 1,8, or 89. 6. Mineral Oxide Mortar Color Tinting Compounds: True Tone Cement Color by Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 2 Davis Colors, Tamms Concentrated Mortar Colors by Tamms Industries, A and H Series by Solomon Grind -Chem Service, Inc. 7. Mortar Waterproofer: Metallic Stearate, Integral Waterpeller by Euclid Chemical, Hydrocide Powder by Sonneborn, Omicron Mortarproofing by ' Master Builders. 8. Refractory Mortar: ASTM C 178. 9. Color: To be selected by Architect ' B. Adjustable Veneer Anchors: ' 1. Type: Two piece adjustable tie and anchor system. 2. Materials: ' a. Steel Wire: 3/16 inch diameter steel wire, ASTM A 82. b. Sheet Metal: Minimum 14 gage bent steel sheet, ASTM A 366. c. Steel Plate: ASTM A36. ' d. Finish: Hot dip galvanized finish, ASTM B 153; 1.50 oz/ft. 3. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Series 300, with hardened tip for fastening to metal studs. 4. Size: As required to extend to within 3/4 inch of outside face of masonry veneer. 5. Strength: Comply with IBC Section 1405. ' 6. Provide dovetail slot anchors at concrete walls to match adjustable ties above. Provide product literature in submittal. 7. Acceptable Anchors: Seismic D/A 213 Adjustable Veneer Anchor by Dur -O- Wal, DW -10HS with Seismiclip by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc., or approved substitution. 2.3 JOINT AND FLASHING MATERIALS A. Neoprene Rubber Vertical Control Joints: 1. Product Data: Neoprene rubber, ASTM D 2000 with durometer hardness of P � ess o 80, or vinyl with shear strength of not less than 450 psi. 2. Acceptable Control Joints: Wide Flange Blok -Joint by Carter - Waters, Blok -Tite by A.A. Wire, Regular or Wide Flange Rapid Control Joint by Dur- O -Wal. B. Polyvinyl Chloride Vertical Control Joints: 1. Product Data: Polyvinyl chloride, ASTM D 2287, Type PVC 6544 with durometer hardness of 85 + / -5, with shear strength of not less than 450 psi. 2. Acceptable Control Joints: Wide Flange Blok -Joint by Carter - Waters, Blok -Tite by A.A. Wire, Regular or Wide Flange Rapid Control joint by Dur- O -Wal. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 C. Horizontal Expansion Joint Fillers: I 1. Product Data: Closed cell foam neoprene rubber, ASTM D 1056, Class RE41, 1/4 inch thick with adhesive on one side. I 2. Acceptable Joints: Rapid Soft Joint by our- O -Wal. D. Vertical Expansion Joint Fillers: ' 1. Product Data: Closed cell foam neoprene rubber, ASTM D 1056, Class RE41, 3/8 inch thick, 3 inches wide. 2. Acceptable Joints: Rapid Expansion Joint by Dur- O -Wal. E. Concealed Modified Bitumen Flashing: I 1. Flashing Material: 8 mil thick film of cross - laminate polyethylene bonded to 32 mil layer of rubberized asphalt compound with silicone coated release sheet. 2. Flashing Dimensions: 18 and 36 inches wide and 75 feet long. 3. Acceptable flashings: Perm -A- Barrier by W.R. Grace. 4. Acceptable Flashing Primers: Penn-A-Barrier primer by W.R. Grace. 5. Acceptable Flashing Sealants: EM3000 Bituthane Elastomeric Mastic by W.R. Grace. F. Vapor Retarder Sheets: 1. Asphalt Saturated Unperforated Felt: ASTM D 226,15 pound type. 2. Polyethylene: ASTM D 2103, 6 mils thick. G. Flashing: Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 (300 Series) 2.4 MIXES I A. Mortar Mixing 1. Mixing Requirements: ASTM C 270 and UBC Table 21A. 2. Compressive Strength: Type S, 1,800 psi at 28 days. 3. Mix Proportions: 1 part portland cement, 1/4 to 1/2 part Lime, and sand equal to 2-1/4 to 3 times cement plus lime, measured by volume. 4. Mixing Methods: Mix by mechanical equipment and proportion by accurate measurement. B. Grout Mixing: ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry ' Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 1 ' 1. Minimum Compressive Strength: ASTM D 476, coarse grout, 2,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Aggregate Size: 3/8 inch minus. 3. Time: Mix cement, lime, aggregate and water for five minutes minimum. 4. Grout Slump: 9 to 11 inches. 5. Intrusion Aid Admixture: Add intrusion aid admixture as recommended by admixture manufacturer. C. Mortar Mixing For Brick Tile: 1. Scratch Coat: 1 art portland cement, 1/2 part lime and 4 P P P parts dry sand to 5 ' parts damp sand or 1 part portland cement, 3 parts dry sand to 4 parts damp sand. 2. Mortar Bed: 1 part portland cement, 1/2 part lime and 5 parts damp sand up to 1 part portland cement, 1 part lime and 7 parts damp sand by volume. 2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Efflorescence Testing: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 67, Article 10, Efflorescence. 2. Test Quantity: One test for each type of paver or brick unit using 10 full size units. 3. Test Rating: Efflorescence not acceptable. 2.6 OPEN CELL WOVEN MORTAR SUSPENSION BATT A. Mortar Net, 10 inches high by 1 inch thick. PART 3 - EXECUTION ' 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Protection: 1. Protect existing adjacent surfaces from mortar stains and stains from acid cleaning. 2. Provide temporary support until masonry walls develop required design strength. B. Surface Preparation: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 5 I 1 1. Remove loose mortar from existing adjacent masonry surfaces. 1 2. Add moisture to masonry units which have a high suction rate. C. Cuffing Masonry Units: , 1. Perform site cutting with sharp power tools to provide straight edges without chips. 2. Cut masonry for openings and joints. 3. Avoid use of less than half size masonry units. D. Installation of Masonry Units: 1. Install masonry units plumb, true, and level in running bond. 1 2. Install masonry units in special masonry patterns where indicated on Drawings. 3. Use special units where required. 4. Set masonry units flush on exposed side of wall and allow variation in unit width to run on concealed face of wall. .5. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. I 6. When adjustment must be made, remove mortar and reinstall the masonry unit 7. Install face brick units with 1/2 inch thick mortar joints. E. Installation of Mortar: _ 1. Provide full face shell mortar beds for hollow masonry units. 1 2. Double butter masonry units to fill vertical head joints solid with mortar. 3. Do not use mortar which has begun to set, or is beyond the recommended elapsed time since initial mixing. 4. Retemper mortar during the recommended elapsed time period only to restore workability. 5. Remove mortar from masonry unit cavities where solid grout is required. 6. Tool exposed joints concave and strike concealed joints flush. F. Installation of Masonry Accessories: 1. Install anchor bolts and pipe sleeves where detailed and required. 2. Install veneer anchors at 16 inches on center both vertical and horizontal at veneer masonry. 3. Install masonry around steel frames, window frames, nailing strips, anchor ' bolts, and other items supplied by other trades. 4. Bed anchors for steel door and relite frames in mortar joints. 5. Install dovetail slot anchors to support masonry veneer as detailed. ' Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 ' G. Installation of Joint and Flashing Materials: 1. Install reglets in mortar joints where exposed flashing meets masonry. ' 2. Provide open -head joints at 36 inches on center in vertical joints at first course of veneer masonry above foundation walls and steel lintel angles. 3. Install vertical and horizontal control joints indicated and required to control masonry cracking. 4. Install vertical and horizontal expansion joint fillers indicated on Drawings and required to fill masonry expansion joints. 1 5. Install concealed flashing above veneer wall lintel angles and foundation walls lapping joints minimum of 2 inches. Provide bead of compatible sealant along top edge of flashing and along seams, cuts and other interruptions. ' 6. Fill cavity above concealed flashing at veneer masonry with open cell woven mortar suspension batt. ' H. Stainless Steel Flashing: ' 1. Clean surface of masonry, make smooth and free from projections. 2. Set in bed of fibered asphalt plastic cement as recommended by flashing manufacturer; overlap and seal joints. r I. Tolerances: I 1. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch maximum in 10 feet, 3/8 inch maximum in 20 feet, 1/2 inch maximum in more than 20 feet. 2. Variation from Horizontal Lines; 1/2 inch maximum in 20 feet, 3/4 inch maximum in more than 40 feet. 3. Variation in Thickness for Walls and Columns: Minus 1/4 inch to plus 1/2 inch from indicated thickness. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Testing Requirements: Comply with test requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control. B. Mortar Tests: 1. Test Requirements; ASTM D 270. 2. Water Retention: ASTM D 91, flow after suction 70 percent of initial flow. 3. Compressive Strength: ASTM C 91, 1,800 psi in 28 days. ' 4. Prism Tests: Prepare and test 3 grouted prism samples and 3 ungrouted prism Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 7 1 samples for each 5,000 square feet of grouted masonry walls. C. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Remove and reinstall masonry units not in alignment. I 2. Remove misplaced, broken, and unbonded masonry units. 3. Adjust location of misplaced reinforcing steel and masonry accessories prior to grouting masonry. 4. Rake and re -point deflective masonry joints. D. Final Cleaning: I 1. Remove excess mortar, grout, and masonry materials from the site. 2. Clean adjacent surfaces and repair surfaces damaged by masonry work. 3. Clean exposed masonry unit walls using an automatic power wash unit with high pressure hot water and proprietary cleaner. I E. Protection: 1. Protect mortar and grout from rain and freezing temperatures until end of curing period. 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from acid cleaning. , END OF SECTION 1 1 I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 04210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Clay Unit Masonry Project Number 106244 Page 8 1 1 1 05120 ' STRUCTURAL STEEL Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: ' 1. Steel columns, base plates and anchor bolts. 2. Shop and field welding. 3. Field bolting. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Prime paint. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings with complete details and instructions for fabrication and installation of structural steel. 1 2. Detail splices where indicated, except where cost savings can be obtained by adding splices to reduce shipping expenses. 3. Where shop drawings contain additional splices, submit splice details and structural calculations bearing the seal and signature of a structural engineer registered in the State of Oregon. 1 C. Weld and Bolt Inspection Reports: Submit two copies of weld and bolt inspection reports. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Welder Qualifications: Use welders certified by American Welding Society for structural welding. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Steel Framing: g Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 05120 . Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Structural Steel Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1 1. . Standard Structural Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. 1 2. High Strength Low Alloy Structural Steel: ASTM A572, Grade 50. 3. Square and Rectangular Steel Tubing: Cold- formed, ASTM A 500, Grade B, Fy = 46 KSI, welded at concealed locations and seamless at exposed locations. B. Connectors: 1 1. - Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts ASTM A 563, Grade A, Hex nuts. 2. Hot Dip Galvanized Standard Bolts: ASTM A 307, .Grade A,. G alvanized bolts with ASTM A 563; Grade A, Hex nuts. 3. Tempered Steel Bolts: ASTM A 449 bolts with ASTM A 563, Grade B, Hex I • nuts. = . . 4. Hot Dip Galvanized Tempered Steel Bolts: ASTM A 449, hot dip 1 galvanized bolts with ASTM A 563, Grade C, Heavy Hex nuts. 5. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325N, A490X, Type 1 or Type 2 bolts with ASTM A 563, Grade C, Heavy Hex nuts. 111 6. . Heat Treated Bolts: ASTM A 490, Type 1 or Type 2 bolts with ASTM 563, Grade DH, Heavy Hex nuts. • 7. Shear Connectors: ASTM. A' 108 steel bars, Grades 1010 through 1020. I 8. Concrete. Anchors: Wedge -All by Simpson. 9. . Masonry Anchors:, Sleeve Anchor by Hilti. • 10. Concrete Epoxy Anchors: Simpson Set Adhesive. 11. Electrodes: AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX. 12. Anchor Bolts: 'ASTM A 36 bolts with ASTM A 563, Grade A, Hex nuts. 13. Hardened Steel Washers: ASTM F 436. • . C. Shop Finish: - I 1. 'Metal Primer: Manufacture's standard rust- inhibitive primer. 2. Metal Primer: Gray Oxide, zinc chromate. I 3. Shop Prime Paint: SSPC15, Type 1, gray oxide. • 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Comply with IBC, Chapter 35, applicable standards. ' 2. Comply with AISC, Manual of Steel ' Construction, Ninth Edition including Specification for the. Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 05120 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Structural Steel Project Number 106244 Page 2 • 3. Comply with AISC, Specifications for Architecturally Exposed Structural ' Steel. 4. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with shop drawings and referenced standards and mark materials for field assembly. 5. Use welds for shop connections and bolts for field connections, except where indicated otherwise on Drawings. 6. Fabricate structural steel to minimize field work. ' B. Fabrication of Shop Welded Connections: ' 1. Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1 and IBC, Chapter 35, applicable standards. ' 2. Shop fabricate steel framing without wrap using welded joints. 3. Provide 3/16 inch minimum fillet welds and full penetration butt welds, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 4. Grind exposed welds smooth. 5. Shop weld bases and bearing plates to steel columns and framing members where indicated for anchorage to concrete and masonry ' substrates C. Fabrication of Shop Bolted Connections: ' 1. Fabricate anchor bolts for connecting to other work. 2. Drill bolt holes in steel 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. 3. Drill anchor bolt holes in concrete 5/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. 4. Do not thread bolts at shear plane. 5. Bolt X- bracing at intersection with one bolt minimum. ' D. Fabrication of Shop Beam Connections: 1. Fabricate shop and field connections which develop the maximum structural capacity for each beam. 2. Comply with standard details, for framed beam connections in Table H or Table III, Case I in the AISC, Manual of Steel Construction, unless noted otherwise. 3. Fabricate gusset plates from 3/8 inch minimum thickness steel plate. 4. Fabricate Standard Frame Connectors appropriate for member size, using maximum number of bolts each beam will allow, using 3/4 inch diameter bolts. 5. Welded connectors of same strength as bolted connectors may be used. E. Fabricating Holes for Anchoring nng Egtupment and Systems: Pacific Crossroads r Corpo ate Center Section 05120 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Structural Steel - Project Number 106244 Page 3 1. Shop or field cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to framing surfaces ' to anchor equipment and systems to structural framing members and reinforce the framing members as required by the Engineer. 2. Weld threaded nuts to framing at holes where required to receive anchor bolts. F. Shop Finish: , 1. After shop weld inspection, clean steel to be primed to remove rust, loose mill scale, slag, splatter, and flux deposits. 2. Shop prime steel with one coat of shop primer in accordance with SSPC- 15. 3. Do not prime finish steel to be encased in concrete, coated with fireproofing, field welded, or contact surfaces for high strength bolting. 4. Apply primer to exposed steel and the initial 2 inches of embedded steel surface. 5. Apply primer at primer manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 6. Apply two coats of primer to areas inaccessible after erection, changing color of second coat. G. Shop Weld Inspections: Owner will employ a testing laboratory to provide IBC required shop inspections. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Structural Preparation: 1. Erect temporary shoring and bracing needed for structural support until • structure is complete. 2. Clean the bottom surface of base and bearing plates. I 3. Clean contact surface of structural steel prior to assembly. B. Erection Requirements: ' 1. Erect steel in accordance with Drawings, reviewed shop drawings, AISC Manual of Steel Construction and IBC, Chapter 35, applicable standards. 2. Perform required cutting, drilling and fitting. 3. Set work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. 4. Align members to tolerance of one in 300 and within 1 inch from design Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 05120 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Structural Steel 111 Project Number 106244 Page 4 i i dimension. 1 5. Install structural members to lines and elevations indicated .on shop drawings. 6. Adjust location of structural members to required tolerances prior to 1 permanent fastening. C. Installation of Anchor Bolts: ' 1. Anchor structural steel to installed concrete and masonry substrates with h concrete and masonry anchors. 1 2. Set anchor bolts in fresh concrete with double nuts and templates. Provide minimum 8 inches embedment unless otherwise noted. ' 3. Drill holes in cast -in -place concrete and secure anchor bolts in anchoring cement. D. Installation of Field Bolted Connections: 1. Install bolted connections as detailed, using not less than 5/8 inch ' diameter bolts. 2. Install 3/4 inch diameter A 325 N high strength bolts with threads allowed in bearing area unless indicated otherwise. I . 3. Install load indicator washers on high strength bolts, ASTM A 325 F. 4. Comply with IBC for installation of high strength bolts. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Field Inspections: Owner will pay Independent Testing Laboratory to provide IBC required field connection inspections. B. Removal of Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Remove temporary and shoring and bracing when structural system is complete. ' C. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Repair rejected field welds and bolted connections 2. Replace or repair members with structural and shop finish defects. 3. Adjust alignment of structural steel to meet 1 in 300 tolerance requirements 4. Adjust location of members more than / inch from design dimension. 5. Grind exposed field welds to smooth finish. 6. Remove oil, dirt, and iron filings from bolted connections. 7. Apply zinc rich prime paint to damaged galvanized finish. 8. Touch up shop prime finish with same prime paint as used in shop. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 05120 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Structural Steel Project Number 106244 Page 5 1 "SECTION END" U 1 1 I 1 1 I 1 I 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 05120 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Structural Steel - Project Number.106244 Page 6 1 06100 ' WOOD FRAMING Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AM Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Interior and exterior bearing and non - bearing wood stud walls. 2. Structural framing for roofs. 3. Blocking, bridging, backing, plates, and ledgers. ' 4. Nails, connectors and hangers, bolts, washers, screws, and other 5. Hardware. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Structural Requirements: Structural lumber and fastenings shall conform to National Design Specification, current Edition. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. Comply with PS 20 and with applicable rules of the respective grading and inspecting agencies for species and products indicated. 2. Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) for plywood products, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for type of panel indicated. 3. Lumber and plywood shall be new, clean stock pieces and grades indicated for various uses. 4. All materials grade trademarked in accordance with one of the following agencies: a. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB) "Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber ". b. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA) "Grading Rules for Western Lumber ". B. Regulatory Agency Requirements: Comply with IBC, Chapter 23. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Wood Framing Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protection: 1. Store all materials in such a manner as to ensure proper ventilation and drainage, and to protect against damage and weather. 2. Keep all materials clearly identified with all grade marks legible. 3. Keep all damaged material clearly identified as damaged, and store separately to prevent its inadvertent use. 4. Do not allow installation of damaged or otherwise non - complying material. 5. Do not deliver framing materials to the site more than 30 days prior to installing unless interior storage space is available. , B. Replacements: In event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no additional , cost to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS I 2.1 FRAMING LUMBER A. Specie, Dressing, and Moisture Content: - 1. Industry Standard: American Softwood Lumber Standard, PS 20 -70. ' 2. Species: Douglas Fir - Larch. 3. Dressing: Smooth four sides, S4S. 4. Maximum Moisture Content: 19% at time of dressing. B. Minimum Lumber Grades: ' 1. Blocking, Bridging and Plates: 2 x 4 to 4 x 6, Standard and Better, Stud Grade, or No. 2. ' 2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Steel Framin g Connectors: 1. Indicated Manufacturer: Simpson Strong -Tie connectors are specifically , requiredto meet the structural calculations of the plans. Prior to substituting manufacturers, confirm load capacity based on ICBO testing. 111 2. Finish for Connectors to be Installed in Exterior and Wet Interior Locations: Hot -dip galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 153. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Wood Framing -' Project Number 106244 Page 2 3. Finish for Connectors to be Installed in Dry Interior Locations: ' Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive prime or zinc coating. B. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, and Screws: 1. Lag Screws: FS FF -B -561, square or hex head. 2. Wood Screws: FS FF -S -111, flat head carbon steel. ' 3. Bolts: FS FF -F -575. 4. Nuts: FS FF -836. 5. Machine Screws: FS FF -S -92, cadmium plated steel. ' 6. Plain Washers: FS FF -W -92, round carbon steel. 7. Lock Washers: FS FF -W -84, helical spring carbon steel. ' 8. Expansion Shields: FS FF -S -325. 9. Toggle Bolts: FS FF -B -588, tumble wing type. C. Nails and Staples: 1. Industry Standard: FS FF -1.05. ' 2. Exterior, Wet Area and Preservative Treated Wood: Hot Dip Galvanized Common wire nails, that meet ASTM Standard A153.. 3. Interior Dry Area Wood: Cadmium plated common wire nails, except as indicated otherwise. 4. Fastener Lengths: As indicated in minimum nailing schedule, as specified in Table IBC 2304.9.1 and of size which will not penetrate framing members which will be exposed or will receive finish materials. 5. All nails to be common nail. ' D. Powder Driven Fasteners and Anchors: Acceptable Fasteners: Powder Driven Fasteners by Hilti, Ramset, or Simpson Strong -Tie. ' 2.3 PRESSURE TREATMENT A. Preservative Treatment Chemicals: 1. Waterborne Oxides for Hem -Fir: ACQ-C, ACQ -D or CA- B /CBA -A, ASTM D 1625, Type C, Wolmanized by Koppers. B. Preservative Treatment: ' 1. Where ossible precut material before treatment. , p tment. 2. Treat lumber in accordance with AWPA C2. 3. Treat cants, nailers, blocking, stripping and similar items adjacent to roofing and flashing and mark with AWPB LP2. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06100 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Wood Framing Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 4. Sill material to be SBX /DOT or zinc borate standard connector coating G90. ' 5. Dry preservative treated lumber to maximum 19% moisture after treatment. 6. Provide not less than 0.25 pounds per cubic foot chemical retention for LP2 treatment. 2.4 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING ' A. Plywood Backing Panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment, provide fire- retardant - treated plywood panels with grade designations, APA C -D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, not less than 15/32 inch. , PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Preparation: Treat field cut and shop cut surfaces of preservative pressure ' treated wood with brush application of waterborne salts in quantity required to comply with Chemical retention for LP2 rating. B. Installation of Blocking: 1. Install blocking for wall mounted door stops in wood framed walls. ' 2. Install smoke stop blocking at double stud wood framed walls and partitions at maximum horizontal intervals of 10'. 3. Install smoke stop blocking at all similar combustible blind spaces exceeding 10' in any dimension to the effect that a barrier to the passage of flame is provided at maximum intervals, both vertical and horizontal, ' of 10'. 4. Anchor wood blocking and bridging to substrates to support applied loads. I 5. Install 2" nominal thick by width of stud blocking at mid- height of single story walls over 8' high. C. Installation of Steel Connectors for Wood Framing: 111 1. Install connectors indicated with nails or bolts of sizes and types specified ' by manufacturer of connector. 2. Where connector numbers are not indicated, provide connectors which are designed to carry dead loads plus snow and live loads indicated. 3. Provide PC post caps at post to beam connections and PB or EPB post Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Wood Framing Project Number 106244 - Page 4 bases at ost to footing p t g connections. D. Nailing and Bolting: ' 1. Minimum nailing in accordance with IBC Table 2305.9.1, and as indicated in minimum nailing schedule and on Drawings. 2. Install washers under nuts and under bolt heads bearing on wood. ' 3. Soap threads of lag bolt prior to installing. 4. Install fasteners for plates to foundation using anchor bolts at not more than 48" on center or powder driven anchors at not more than 32" on ' center. 5. Drill lag screw holes 9/16" diameter for 3/4" bolts, and 1/2" diameter for 5/8" bolts. ' 6. Drill machine bolt holes 1/16" larger than bolt diameter. 7. Furnish bolts with threads for nuts not bearing on wood. ' 8. Enlarge lag screw holes to shank diameter for length of unthreaded shank. 9. Do not drive lag screws, and wood screws. ' 10. Predrill nail holes and screw holes when required to prevent wood splitting. 11. All fasteners at pressure treated materials to be hot dipped galvanized or ' stainless steel. E. Installation of Temporary Support: 1. Adequately brace structure for wind and earthwork forces until roof and wall panels have been secured. ' 3.2 COMPLETION t A. Adjusting Defective Work: ' 1. Remove split and warped framing prior to installation of sheathing and gypsum wall panels. 2. Adjust framing to comply with location and deflection requirements of National Design Specifications. B. Daily Cleaning: Remove excess wood, sawdust, and loose fasteners from the 1 Site. "SECTION END" Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Wood Framing ' Project Number 106244 Page 5 • I 1 06115 SHEATHING ' Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AM Engineers. ' PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCULDES: A. Wood roof sheathing. B. Wood wall sheathing. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Regulatory Requirements: ' 1. Comply with applicable recommendations in APA E 30, Design /Construction Guide - Residential and Commercial. 2. Comply with PS 1 (ANSI A 199.1) or, for products not manufactured under PS 2 provisions, with applicable APA Performance Standard for I e of panel indicated. 3. FUrnish laminated wood panel graded by American Plywood Association. ' 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING - A. Acceptance at Site: Examine panels upon delivery, and reject panels which are . delivered with broken corners or edges, crushed by bundling straps, or that are delaminated. ' PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ' A. Wood Sheathing: 1. Industry Standard: APA, Construction and Industrial Softwood Plywood, PS 1. 2. Plywood Roof Sheathing: 1/2 thick, C -D Interior with exterior glue, square edges, Index 32/16, APA Rated, Exposure 1. ' 3: Optional Roof Sheathing: 15/32 thick, APA rated, oriented strand board, exterior glue, index 32/16. 4. Plywood Wall Sheathing: 1/2 thick, medium density overlaid plywood type 303 -OL. ' B. Fasteners: 1. Industry Standard for Nails and Staples: FS FF -105. 2. Fasteners for Plywood Wall Sheathing: Galvanized finish nails. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06115 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C _ Sheathing Project Number 106244 Page 1 I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE , A. Installation of Wood Roof Sheathing: 1. Install wood sheathing panels with strong axis perpendicular to supports with end joints staggered. • 2. Space sheathing panels as recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 3. Eliminate sheathing pieces less than 1 foot wide with adjustment in layout. B. Installation of Plywood Wall Sheathing: I 1. Install wood sheathing panels with strong axis perpendicular to supports with end joints staggered. 2. Space sheathing panels as recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 3. Install sheathing over building paper. 4. Seal joints. 5. Fill nail indentions flush to surface prior to painting. ' 3.2 MINIMUM FASTENING SCHEDULE: SEE DRAWINGS 3.3 COMPLETION ' A. Adjusting Defective Work: Remove and replace defective sheathing and underlayment panels and panels with edges split or damaged by fasteners. B. Final Cleaning: Remove fasteners, wood sawdust, and unused panel pieces from the site. ' "SECTION END" 1 1 i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06115 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Sheathing Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 06150 ' WOOD CHORD JOISTS Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Wood Chord Joists. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Design Requirements: 1. Roof Design Load: 25 pounds per square foot of snow load plus drift as noted on the design drawings. 2. Connection at Exterior Wall Load Parallel to Top Chord: 200 pounds per linear foot of wall for wind and seismic loads. ' 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing dimensions, design loads, bracing, and structural connections stamped by a licensed structural engineer in the state of the project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabrication plant shall be approved by ICBO for joist manufacturing. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Chord Joists: 1. Trus Joist Corporation. ' 2. Western Wood Structures, Incorporated. 2.2 JOIST COMPONENTS A. Flange members, web members, and adhesives shall conform g to the provisions Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 06150 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Wood Chord Joists ' Project Number 106244 Page 1 of NES Report No. NER -200 or the appropriate CCMC report number. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Joist Fabrication: U 1. Comply with requirements in CABO Report. 2. Manufacturered in a plant approved for fabrication by the building code and under the supervision of an approved third party inspection agency. B. Tolerances: 1. Depth: +/ -1/16 inch 2. Flange Width: +/- 1/16" inch C. Identification: Each of the joists shall be identified by a stamp indicating the joist type, NER or CCMC report number, manufacturer's name, plant number, and the independent inspection agency's logo. D. Acceptable Joists: TJI Series by Trus Joist or approved substitution. PART 3- EXECUTION ' 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation of Wood Chord Joists 1. Place joists in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. 2. Brace joists against temporary construction loads which cuase member stresses beyond design limits. ' 3. Brace joist to prevent toppling movement during erection. 4. Install manufacturer's standard bearing hardware, blocking, and permanent bridging to comply with CABO report. 5. Remove temporary bracing after sheathing, bridging, and permanent bracing is installed. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Inspection: Schedule inspection with Architect after completion of joist ' installation and prior to enclosing joists. B. Manufacturer's Field Service: 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06150 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Wood Chord Joists Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1. Manufacturer's representative shall inspect the site after joists and joist ' accessories are installed, prior to enclosing joists. 2. Manufacturer's representative shall submit written report of field observations with submittal of Inspection Certificate. ' C. Adjusting Defective Work: ' 1. Remove and replace defective and damaged joists, bearing plates, blocking, and bridging members. 2. Adjust joists not within 1/2 inch of horizontal alignment. 3. Adjust joists not within 1/8 inch of vertical alignment at bearing points. D. Final Cleaning: Remove unused fasteners and unused components from the site. "SECTION END" I 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 06150 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Wood Chord Joists Project Number 106244 Page 3 06193 ' GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS Section not prepared by Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of AAI ' Engineers. PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glue laminated beams. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: ' 1. Submit shop drawings which indicate structural unit locations, field dimensions, beam camber, and connection details. 2. Indicate appearance grade and shop finish for each member. I B. Certificates: Submit AITC Certificate of Conformance with ANSI /AITC A190.1. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Licensed by American Institute of Timber Construction, AITC. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Wood: ' 1. Main Beam Species: Douglas Fir. 2. Main Beam Stress Grade: 24F -V4 for simple span members and 24F -V8 for cantilevered and continuous span members. ' 3. Allowable Beam Stress: Fb = 2400 psi, Fc = 650 psi, Fv = 190 psi except where indicated otherwise on Drawings. 4. Adhesive: Exterior glue. 5. Appearance: Industrial grade. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 06193 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glue Laminated Structural Units Project Number 106244 Page 1 B. Connection Materials: 1. Steel: ASTM A 36. 2. Nails: FS FF -N -105, galvanized, Common. 3. Bolts: FS FF -B -575, cadmium plated steel. 4. Bolts: ASTM A 307. 5. Washers: FS FF -W -92, round carbon steel, plain. 6. Nuts: ASTM A 563, Grade A, Style hex. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Required Industry Fabrication Standards: 1. Comply with ANSI /AITC q 190.1, Structural Glue Laminated Timber. 2. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of AITC. B. Specific Fabrication Requirements: 1. Fabricate exposed members to Industrial appearance grade. 2. Fabricate concealed members to Industrial appearance grade. 3. Dry laminating wood to 12% maximum moisture content at fabrication plant during surfacing and laminating with not more than 5% variation within assembled units. - 4. Fabricate interior members for wet condition of service. 5. Cut, notch, and shape members as indicated on shop drawings. 6. Camber beams and purlins as indicated on Drawings. C. Finishing Requirements: 1. Coat ends with manufacturer's standard primer or sealer as soon as ends are cut. 2. Finish Industrial Appearance Grade units with no sealer. 3. Furnish main members individually wrapped. 4. Furnish secondary members bundle wrapped in waterproof paper. D. Fabrication of Steel Connectors: ' 1. Fabricate custom steel connecting hardware for glue laminated timber as indicated on Drawings and as required for structural support. 2. Clean steel surfaces and prime with rust inhibitive primer. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL ' t Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 06193 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glue Laminated Structural Units Project Number 106244 Page 2 A. Fabrication Plant t Tests: Perform tests to comply with AITC 200. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Installation of Glue Laminated Structural Units: 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and applicable P Y pp standards for erection, anchorage, and nailing of laminated structural units. 1 2. Comply with AITC Specification Number 106 Paragraph 7 and 8 for erection of members. 3. Coat ends of members with sealer or primer as soon as ends are trimmed at the Site. 4. Install beams with crown edge on top. t 5. Connect laminated wood members with framing connectors as indicated and as required. 6. Install temporary bracing to resist structural loads until roof and wall structural members are permanently attached. 3.2 COMPLETION • A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Relocate members not within 1/2" from design standards. 2. Replace members which do not meet standard fabrication tolerances. 3. Replace defective and damaged members. t B. Final Cleaning: Remove excess materials from Site. "SECTION END" • I I 1 i Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 06193 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glue Laminated Structural Units Project Number 106244 Page 3 I 07100 WATERPROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Provide a complete composite sheet membrane waterproofing system. 2. Work includes all applicable sealants, waterstops and waterproofing flashings needed to ensure a complete waterproof system for buried concrete and masonry components at locations indicated. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. B. Product data: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for verification. 6. Where work of this Section may potentially contact groundwater, include manufacturer's report confirming - laboratory testing of membrane system with project groundwater samples and confirming suitability for installation in Project conditions. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and g Y experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the ' specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Waterproofing ' Project Number 106244 Page 1 I I B. Applicator qualifications: I 1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope and complexity. 2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. 1 C. Convene a pre - installation job -site conference three weeks prior to commencing work of this Section: 1. Secure attendance by Architect, Contractor, applicator, and authorized representatives of the membrane system manufacturer and interfacing trades. 2. Examine Drawings and Specifications affecting work of this Section, verify all conditions, review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing portions of the Work. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. B. Maintain the products in a dry condition during delivery, storage, handling, I installation, and concealment. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600. 1r 1.5 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS I A. Provide applicator with substrates that are free of standing water, dirt and debris, loose material, voids and protrusions or deformations which may inhibit application or performance of waterproofing. 1. Where work of this Section will be installed on earth, provide I subgrades that are stable, smoothed and compacted to minimum 85 percent modified proctor density. 2. Where work of this Section will be installed on earth retaining system, fill gaps and voids in earth retaining system to conform with waterproofing manufacturer's requirements; fill voids and cavities exterior of wood - lagged shoring with sand or cement slurry; remove nails in wood lagging. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Waterproofing Project Number 106244 Page 2 I I 3. Provide substrates that are free of voids deeper than 3/8" and free of I 4. surface protrusions more than 1/4" above the surface. Provide wood float or better finish to surfaces scheduled to receive the membrane. I 5. Include bentonite waterstop strips, provide concrete surfaces as required for that installation. 6. Rigidly install penetrations of membrane for detailing procedures. 1 1.6 WARRANTY I A. Deliver to Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against defective materials and workmanship for a period of five years following date of completion. Warrant that installed waterproofing system shall be I free of defects including waterproofing failure resulting from substrate cracking up to 1/8 inch. I 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering materials. 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. I PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MATERIALS A. Where indicated on the Drawings, provide a complete dual- waterproofing, I resealable, composite sheet membrane system composed of high - density polyethylene with a sodium - bentonite face designed for buried concrete or masonry construction having the following attributes. 1. Acceptable products I a. Paraseal Membranes, "Paraseal LG Membrane" b. Approved substitution. 2. Obtain primary waterproofing materials of each type required from I a single manufacturer to greatest extent possible. Provide accessory materials that are approved by membrane manufacturer. B. Membrane properties: 1. Puncture resistance 169 lbs. ASTM E154 I 2. Tensile strength 4,000 psi ASTM D412 3. Water vapor permeance 0.03 perms ASTM E96 4. Percent elongation 700 percent ASTM D638, Type 4 Dumbbell 1 5. Resistance to hydrostatic head 150 feet ASTM D751 6. _ Warranted crack bridging capability 1/8 inch I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rPo Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ _ Waterproofing I _ Project Number 106244 Page 3 I I 2.2 ACCESSORIES I A. For installation at horizontal -to- vertical junctures, provide "Paragranular" loose bentonite granules in weatherproof 50 lb. bags and capable of swelling I to occupy a minimum volume of 17 ml when 2 grams are dispersed into deionized water. B. For detailing vertical junctures and penetrations, provide "Paramastic" non - hydrated expandable mastic of trowelable consistency containing not less that 55 percent high swelling Wyoming sodium bentonite. C. Provide the following fasteners as needed: I 1. Case- hardened steel nail with fluted shank having a minimum 1" length and a minimum 1" diameter cap for use on green concrete and J masonry substrates. 2. Powder shot steel pin having a minimum 3/4" diameter washer for use on hardened concrete substrates. 3. Steel staples approved by membrane manufacturer for use according to Project conditions. • D. Provide the following seam tapes g p as needed: 1. "Temporary Tape" reinforced temporary joint closure tape 3" wide composed of acrylic adhesive bonded to polyvinyl chloride coated fabric used to protect seams against debris intrusion during backfill and for temporary terminations during periods of exposure to rain. 2. "Permanent Seam Tape" reinforced, rubberized - asphaltic waterproofing seam tape 4" wide by 60 mils thick for sealing , membrane overlaps wherever flood - testing is required and elsewhere as required by Project conditions or designs. 3. " Para JT Tape" non - reinforced, adhesive tape of partially cross - linked polymeric elastomers 2" wide by 1/8" thick for molding form -fit seals around difficult contours and for taping seams within overlaps. E. Provide "Paraterm Bar" extruded aluminum bar with upper flange to receive sealant for terminations at grade line. F. Provide "Vulkem 116 Sealant" one -part or Vulkem 227 two -part, gun -grade polyurethane sealant for completing termination seals and other sealing recommended by manufacturer. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Waterproofing Project Number 106244 Page 4 I G. Provide "Vulkem 201 or Vulkem 222 Elastomeric Flashing " polyurethane, liquid- applied, elastomeric waterproofing flashing. H. Provide "Parastick'N'Dry" pressure sensitive, double -sided tape laminate of bentonite sandwiched between a netting and non -woven fabric for wrapping through- concrete imbeds and other detailing. I. Provide "Superstop" flexible, reinforced, bentonite - laminate waterstop strips 1/2" by 1" by 20' -0" with pressure- sensitive adhesive backing for sealing static cold joints in concrete. J. Provide "Para rimer" versatile adhesive bonding agent primer formulated g g p ed for use with tapes and pressure- sensitive waterproofing accessories. K. Provide an approved Tremco pp e co Inc. drainage mat from the TREMDrain series of products such as TREMDrain, TREMDrain 1000 or TREMDrain 2000 composed of a filter fabric laminated to free - draining high - density dimpled polystrene drainage core. 2.3 Provide TREMDrain Total- Drain: replaces perforated pipe and aggregate connect directly to the approved Tremco Inc. TREMDrain product. A. Provide base sheet of minimum 6 mil polyethylene sheet for use as hydration barrier below slabs. B. Provide protection course as recommended by the waterproof system Y rP Y manufacturer. 2.4 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the membrane system manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure ro er and adequate P P q provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section and to prevent damage to installed waterproofing. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Waterproofing Project Number 106244 Page 5 I I B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. I 1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements; 2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect; 1 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION 1 A. General: Surface preparation and detailing procedures shall be in accord with this Specification and the Drawings. Comply with waterproofing 1 system manufacturer's instructions except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified. I B. Lay out project to determine and anticipate conditions prior to start of work. 1. Note termination and penetration conditions to determine methods 1 for creating a waterproof envelope. Verify that where below -grade waterproofing extends to grade, other waterproofing provides for substrate continuing above grade. 3.3 INSTALLATION • A. General: Install waterproofing system in accord with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and specific project instructions as applies to 111 the Work. 1. Coves: Form 2" coves with granular bentonite at horizontal -to- I vertical junctures such as at footings and horizontal shelves; form 1" coves with sealant, elastomeric flashing or expandable mastic at II vertical inside corners and under ledges. 2. Place membrane in manner that assures minimum handling; fit closely to and seal around inlets, outlets and other penetrations; press membrane tight to corner surfaces and securely fasten. 3. Priming: Prime concrete, masonry and metal surfaces with substrate primer immediately prior to application of tapes and pressure- I sensitive waterproofing accessories. 4. Terminations: Terminate membrane system with termination bar finished off with bead of sealant or terminate to elastomeric flashing 1 using reinforced waterproofing tape. 5. Construction joints: Protect static construction joints in concrete with flexible, reinforced, bentonite - laminate waterstop strips; install to t suitable hardened concrete surface prior to subsequent concrete I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07100 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Waterproofing Project Number 106244 Page 6 I placement. B. Backfilled wall installation: 1. Install membrane sheets in vertical or horizontal lifts with HDPE -side facing applicator to prepared surfaces conforming to manufacturer's requirements. a. Vertical installation: Securely fasten membrane 12" on center along top edge with sheet extending out onto footing surfaces 6" minimum, overlapping below -slab membrane 6 "; install subsequent membrane sheets to overlap previous sheets 1 -1/2" minimum; securely fasten membrane 24" on center through both sheets at overlaps; securely fasten 18" on center to tops of footing surfaces and horizontal shelves; apply seam tape to seam overlaps. b. Horizontal installation: Start membrane at lowest portion of wall; securely fasten membrane 24" on center along top edge with sheet extending out onto footing surfaces 6" minimum, overlapping under slab membrane 6 "; install subsequent membrane sheets to overlap previous sheets minimum 1 -1/2" in shingle fashion with staggered end laps; securely fasten I membrane 24" on center through both sheets at overlaps; securely fasten 18" on center to tops of footing surfaces and horizontal shelves; apply seam tape to seam overlaps. 2. Waterproof penetrations in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. "SECTI END" I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07100 Mildren Design Croup, P.C. _ Waterproofing Project Number 106244 Page 7 II 07180 WATER REPELLENTS PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Clear silane and siloxane water repellent coatings. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit 2 copies of coating material content and percentage ercenta P g P g analysis. B. Product Samples: 11 1. Submit 8 by 8 inch minimum sized samples of proposed water repellent on masonry units for review of transparent color and gloss. 2. Submit product samples not less than 5 days prior to application of field samples. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Applicator shall have completed a minimum of 5 rojects of comparable P l p size. 2. Applicator shall be acceptable to the water repellent manufacturer's representative. B. Field Samples: 1. Provide 100 square feet of water repellent on exterior face of completed face brick and clay masonry unit walls, prior to pre- application conference. 2. Acceptable field samples may be incorporated in the Work. C. Pre - Application Conference requirements: 1. Schedule pre - application conference prior to starting water repellent coating work and after application of field sample. 2. Conduct conference meeting at the site and in the presence of the Contractor, coating applicator, Architect, and water repellent coating Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07180 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Water Repellents Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 1 manufacturer's representative. 3. Revise masonry substrate condition and results from moisture and alkalinity tests. 4. Review construction schedule, field sample, and method of water repellent coating application, and protection. I 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Furnish a label on each container of water repellent coating indicating manufacturer's name, product stock number, type of coating, instructions for reducing, and material content percentages. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS I A. Environmental Requirements: • 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed environmental protection requirements. 2. Apply coating when ambient temperature is 40 degrees F minimum for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after application. 3. Apply coating when no rain has occurred for 24 hours prior to and during application and when no rain is forecast for 24 hours after application. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's standard two year warranty setting forth terms and limitations. i B. Applicator's Guarantee: 1. Furnish guarantee from applicator stating that applied water repellent coating is applied on all exposed face brick and clay unit masonry exposed surfaces. 2. Applicator shall repair defects in the water repellent coating which occur within 2 years after substantial completion of water repellent coating work. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Silane Water Repellents: CHEM -TRETE BSM 40 by Huls America, Inc., or approved substitution. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07180 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Repellents - Project Number 106244 Page 2 I B. Siloxane Water Repellents: Baracade Silosane 16 by Tan Industries, or approved substitution. C. Verify any jurisdictional VOC regulations prior to start of work and notify architect within 5 days of bid acceptance. D. Provide VOC complying product by specified manufacturer or approved substitution if required by jurisdiction. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Surfaces: 1. Conduct moisture meter tests until substrate contains less than 30 percent moisture. 2. Conduct alkalinity tests until substrate is between 6.8 and 8.0. 3. Correct defective substrate conditions prior to starting water repellent coating work. B. Protection: 1. Cover and protect adjacent surfaces and landscaping from coating splatter prior to application of water repellent coating 2. Cover doors and windows with adhesive tape and polyethylene sheets, if recommended or required by manufacturer. C. Surface Preparation: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions 2. Remove stained and loose mortar and fill holes in mortar joints. 3. Remove stained, cracked, and loose masonry units, install new masonry units and fill mortar joints. 4. Remove form release agents, curing compounds, and surface dirt 5. Fill holes and cracks in substrate more than 1/16 inch wide. D. Application of Silane Sealer: 1. Apply using airless spray equipment. 2. Spray to thoroughly wet wall to break surface tension. 3. Follow with flood coat overlapping horizontal strokes with sufficient Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07180 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Water Repellents Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 1 sealer for saturation and to cause a 6 " -8" run down from point of contact. 4. Thoroughly saturate all mortar joints. I 3.2 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: Touch -up defective and damaged clear water repellent coatings. B. Final Cleaning: Remove splattered clear water repellent g p p ent coating from adjacent windows, doors, flashings, and concrete walls, as recommended by coating manufacturer. "SECTION END" • I I 1 1 I 1 • • I 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07180 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Water Repellents Project Number 106244 Page 4 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermal blanket insulation under roof deck. 2. Thermal blanket insulation in framing spaces 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data on insulation prior to ordering materials. 2. Submit information on R- value, thickness, vapor retarder perm rating, and fire ratings for each type of insulation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. R -Value Qualifications: Manufacturers shall use independent laboratory tests for determining R- values. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING • A. Storage and Protection: Store insulation in dry areas, above grade, and protect from moisture and physical damage. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMAL INSULATION A. Unfaced Insulation: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class C. 2. Flame Spread: Class A, 25 or less. 3. Mineral Type: Fiberglass. 4. Thermal Resistance: R -19. B. Faced Insulation: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 665, Type III, Class C. 2. Flame Spread: Class A, 25 or less. 3. Mineral Type: Fiberglass. • 4. Facing: Flame resistant foil- scrim -kraft facing adhered to the fiber glass. 5. Water Vapor Permenance: 0.02 perms - - - -- - - — - - 6. Thermal Resistance: R -11 2.2 INSULATION HOLDER ASSEMBLY Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Building Insulation Project Number 106244 Page 1 • I A. Assembly: r 1. Manufacturer: Lamtec WMPVR 2. Type: Polypropylene film. 3. Vapor Barrier: a. Construction: 0.0015 inch fil, combined with reinforcing layer and 11 pound kraft paper. b. Scrim 4 x 5 tri directional with a blend of fiberglass and polyester yarn c. Vapor s. Transmission Rate: 0.09 US perm (ASTM E96, Procedure A) d. Tensile Strength: 40 pounds in the machine direction and 30 pounds in the cross- machinie direction. e. Flame Spread: Maximum 25. f. Permeance: .05 perms. 2.3 INSULATION ACCESSORIES I A. Insulation Tape: 1. Width: 1 -7/8 inch or 2 -1/2 inch. I 2. Acceptable Barrier Tape: Polypropylene tape furnished by insulation manufacturer or 8086 Contractor Sheathing Tape by 3M Contractor Products. I PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE I A. Installation of Thermal Blanket Insulation: 1. Install insulation between framing members with vapor barrier on the inside face. 2. Install insulation in roof spaces separating heated from unheated space. 3. Staple flanges to wood framing members at 12 inches on center over entire length. 4. Tape joints, ruptures, and terminal edges of vapor barrier faces with insulation tape to form a completely sealed vapor barrier. 5. Install insulation between piping and exterior surface. B. Installation of Flame Resistant Thermal Blanket Insulation: I 1. Install insulation between framing members with vapor barrier on the inside face. 2. Install under roof framing spaces separating heated from unheated , spaces. 3. Secure insulation to the framing space in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. i C. Installation of Vapor Barrier Over Unfaced Batts: 1. Install vapor barrier to interior side of building envelope at all locations utilizing unfaced batt. 2. Install vapor barrier directly to metal stud flanges with manufacturer's Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07210 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Building Insulation Project Number 106244 Page 2 11 recommended adhesive. 3. Install insulation wire hanger system in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations at required location. 4. Patch cuts or tears with manufacturer recommended tape. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Cover openings in insulation vapor barriers with insulation tape. 2. Remove and replace wet blanket insulation. 3. Fill openings in exterior framing spaces. B. Cleaning: Remove excess insulation materials from Site. "SECTION END" I 11 I I I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07210 . Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Building Insulation Project Number 106244 Page 3 II 07510 BUILT -UP BITUMINOUS ROOFING PART 1- GENERAL 11 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cant insulation. 2. Roofing and flashing felts. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Contractor to submit with bid, a listing of each installer, bid, and any extensions to the guarantee and maintenance agreement contained within this Section. B. Product Data: 1. Submit product information on roof system components. 2. Submit list of proposed roofing materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Subcontractor's ualifications: Approved Q pp owed by the felt manufacturer as qualified to install the material. B. Guarantee: Perform work and make provisions to conform completely to manufacturer's requirements. Do not include fee in bid. Owner has option of requiring and if issued, fee will be paid by Owner. C. Pre -Roof Conference: 1. Meet at the Site with Representatives from membrane manufacturer, Contractor, roof membrane installer, metal roof flashing installer, electrical, mechanical, and plumbing subcontractors and Architect. 2. Review condition of roof deck and verify roof slope to roof drains. 1 3. Review Contract Documents, shop drawings, and membrane manufacturer's standard flashing details and installation instructions. 4. Review material delivery and storage, installation schedule and procedures, and required tests and inspections. 5. Record decisions and distribute copies of pre -roof conference decisions to Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07510 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Built -up Bituminuous Roofing Project Number 106244 Page 1 I 1 conference participants. D. Standards: I 1. Minimum UL Class B system. I 2. Attachment: Minimum FM I-60 Class. 1.4 WARRANTY I A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Furnish manufacturer's standard roof warranty on manufacturer's standard form, setting forth terms, conditions, and limitations for roof system materials. B. Installer's Warranty: 1. Furnish installer's roof and flashing warranty for a water tight roof and flashing system for not less than two years. 2. Installer shall replace defective roof and flashing systems which fail within two years after Substantial Completion without additional cost to the Owner. 1.5 MAINTENANCE 1 A. Roof Membrane and Roof Flashing Maintenance: 1. Contractor and roofing installer shall inspect the roof and flashing assembly and make emergency repairs within 24 hours after receiving notification from the Owner. 2. Contractor and roofing installer shall restore defective roof assembly to meet requirements of the original specification within 30 days, except I when permitted by the Owner. 3. The cost for repair of roof and flashing leaks caused by abuse from the Owner's personnel, tenant, other contractors, unnatural climatic I conditions including lightning and hail, will be paid by Owner. 4. Agreement to maintain roofing system shall be in written form acceptable to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF .1 ROO SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Built -up Roof Assembly: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07510 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Built -up Bituminuous Roofing Project Number 106244 Page 2 I 1. Johns Manville 4GNC a. Ply sheets: Glas Ply roofing felt complying with ASTM D2178, Type IV, Table 1 and 2. b. Base Ply: Glas Base. • . c. Cap: Glas Kap. d. Flashings: Dynaflex membrane having a tensile strength of 170 pounds machine direction and 115 pounds cross direction lb. /in. at I .0 degrees F., as recommended by NBS Building Science Series 55. B. Cant Strips: . • • . 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 208, Perlite. • 2. Minimum Size: 4" face. . C. Fasteners and Accessories: 1. Provide all necessary mechanical fasteners and - accessories made or recommended by roofing manufacturer required for complete installation. D. 1 Approved Substitutions: . Malarky System M4 -BIB -H with #605 Panoply to be used for base I . 1. flashings I PART 3- EXECUTION . . 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates and conditions under which roof system is to be installed. 2. ,Examine wood deck nailing and deck openings prior to starting work. 3. - Remove all nails or fasteners not completely embedded in roof structure. 4. Do not proceed with roof, work until unsatisfactory conditions . have been ' - corrected. ' 5. Proceeding with work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. - 6. Do not bring or lay roofing unless temperature is at least 40 degrees F and rising or unless otherwise specified in writing. - 7: Apply and install built-up roofing without interruptions until complete, or cover and protect exposed edges of roofing at end of each work day 1 with glaze coat of bitumen. . . 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center - - - Section 07510 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ - Built -up Bituminuous Roofing I Project Number 106244 - Page 3 1 1 B. Dryness of Structure: Do not commence installation of roofing over roof system until all substrate are sufficiently dry to satisfactorily receive installation. 1 C. Surface Preparation: 1. Patch roof openings and check plywood nailing, prior to installing roof g p g base sheet. 2. Sweep roof substrate clean. D. Maximum Kettle Temperature: 1 1. Heat asphalt to 500 degrees F. maximum except 475 degrees F. maximum for Type I asphalt. 2. Do not exceed maximum temperatures published by the membrane manufacturer for each type of asphalt. E. Minimum Asphalt Temperature at Point of Application: 1. Not less than 350 degrees F. for Type I and II asphalt and not less than 400 degrees F. for Type III and IV asphalt. 2. Do not apply asphalt below minimum temperature s. published by the membrane manufacturer for each type of asphalt. , F. Installation of Base and Flashing Sheets: 1 1. Install base sheets in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, with membrane manufacturer's recommended lap at edges and ends. 2. Nail base sheets at laps and in field of sheet as recommended by membrane manufacturer. 3. Install flashing sheets to comply with membrane manufacturer's standard I detail for each field condition. G. Installation of Insulation Materials: In angles of roof deck and vertical walls or curbs, provide the indicated cant strips, fitting flush at ends and to wall surface. Anchor to substrate as recommended by membrane manufacturer. H. Installation of Roofing and Hashing Felts and Coatings: g g g 1. Install base sheet or vapor retarder, roofing felts, bitumen, and surface I materials in accordance with felt manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Install flashing sheets to comply with felt membrane manufacturer's standard detail for each field condition. 3. Install mineral surface cap sheets in cut and flop method with lengths not Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07510 Mildren Design - Group, P.C. Built -up Bituminuous Roofing - Project Number 106244 Page 4 I 1 to exceed 16'-0". ' 4. Stagger cap sheet end joints 48" minimum. 5. Apply color matching cap sheet granules to asphalt exposed after installation of mineral cap sheets. ' I. Vent Pipe Flashing: ' 1. Install flashing, set on top of first ply of base sheet and seal with a 6" wide strip of flashing set in asphalt. 2. Cut a collar of base sheet to fit around the vent and overlap the flange 12" on all sides, placed in asphalt. 3. After roofing has been applied, form a plastic cant around base of vent. 111 3.2 WATERSTOPS ' A. Install temporary cutoffs around incomplete edges of roofing assembly at the end of each work day and when work must be postponed due to inclement weather. Seal the membrane to the deck or existing membrane. Remove the temporary seals completely when work resumes, cutting out the contaminated membrane. Remove all sealant, contaminated membrane, insulation fillers, etc. from the work area and properly dispose off -site. 3.3 COMPLETION - A. Adjusting Defective Work: Repair defective felts, flashings, and cap sheets. B. Final Cleaning: ' 1. Remove excess asphalt from adjacent finished surfaces. P adjacent ' 2. Remove excess materials from the site. C. Protection of Installed Work: 1. Cover and protect membrane assembly from moisture prior to completion. ' 2. Cover exposed insulation and flash exposed roof assembly edges at end of each workday. 3. Protect membrane assembly from exposure to construction traffic. "SECTION END" Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rp Section 07510 I Mildren Design Group, P.C. Built -up Bituminuous Roofing - Project Number 106244 Page 5 • 07600 ' FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1- GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Parapet wall coping. ' 2. Roof counterflashing. 3. Roof penetration flashing. ' B. Provide flashing and sheet metal as indicated in other Sections, but required to prevent water penetration through the exterior building wall and roof systems. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ' A. Performance Requirements: Perform flashing and sheet metal work free from water leakage under all weather conditions. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: ' 1. Submit roduct data on coil coating performance for fade, abrasion, $ p asion, pollution, and humidity tests. 2. Submit product data on panel systems, including panel profiles, fasteners, closure gaskets, and sealants. ' B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings which indicate sheet metal dimensions, spacing of anchors, and joint construction. 1.4 WARRANTY ' A. Installer's Warranty: 1. Provide written warranty against defect in materials and labor for a period of not less than two years. 2. Installer shall repair leaks in the flashing and downspout system which occur during the warranty time period. ' B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide standard finish warranty ty on coil coated steel Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Flashing and Sheet Metal Project Number 106244 Page 1 i sheets. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with all pertinent recommendations contained in "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual ", current edition, of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 2. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, and reglets, provided all such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified herein. 3. Conform to details and description in SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, Fifth Edition, 1993 with Addendum #1, for workmanship and methods employed in forming, anchoring and cleating of sheet metal work. PART 2- PRODUCTS , 2.1 MATERIALS A. Coil Coated Steel Sheet 1. Industry Standard: ASTM A 446, Grade A, 33,000 psi. ' 2. Thickness: 24 gauge, 0.023 inch unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 3. Protective coating: G90 galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 525. 4. Bond Coat: Mill phosphatized and zinc chromate coated. 5. Prime Coat: .2 mil corrosion resistant primer 6. Finish Coat: Kynar Base, 70 percent polyvinylidene (PVF2) ' 7. Color: Custom color to be selected by Owner /Architect. B. Fastening Materials: I 1. Clips: Same gauge and type as metal covering. 2. Concealed Fasteners for Galvanized Steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel nails and cadmium plated screws. 3. Exposed Fasteners for Coil Coated Steel: Hot -dip galvanized steel or stainless steel nails and stainless steel or cadmium plated screws with neoprene grommeted washers and nylon capped to match coil coated sheet steel color. 4. Color Matching Rivets: Rivets with prefinished color to match adjacent sheet metal may be used when approved by Architect. I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ - Flashing and Sheet Metal Project Number 106244 Page 2 5. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2 part noncorrosive xy p corrosive metal seam cement compound for ' stationary riveted joints. C. Accessory Materials: ' 1. Paper Slip Sheet: 5 pound rosin sized building paper. 2. Bituminous Felt Paper: ASTM D 226, 15 pound unperforated asphalt saturated felt. 3. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 2822, asphaltic. 4. Bituminous Coating: SSPC Paint 12, solvent bituminous mastic, nominally ' free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness. 5. Mastic Sealants: Nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating polyisobutylene rubber caulk or tape sealants. 6. Downspout Head Screws: Stainless steel or bronze mesh fabricated from not less the 20 gauge wire. D. Counterflashing Systems: 1 1. Reglet Material: Galvanized steel. 2. Reglet Design: Spring loading design with recess or surface mounted for framed walls. ' 3. Acceptable Reglets: Fry Reglet. E. Elastomeric Sealants: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Type S or M. 2. Composition: Polyurethane. 3. Shore A Hardness: 15 to 30. 4. Joint Movement Range: Plus or minus 25 %. ' 5. Color: As selected by Architect. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Shop Forming Requirements: ' 1. Size metal joints for thermal movement of sheet metal. 2. Fabricate to dimensions indicated on drawings. 3. Break form metal sheets to sharp and true angles with flat surfaces free ' from wave, warp, and buckle. 4. Fold exposed edges of sheet metal back to form' inch wide hem on side concealed from view. ' 5. After fabrication, touch up damaged coil coated and primed sheet metal finish. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Flashing and Sheet Metal ' Project Number 106244 Page 3 I i B. Fabrication of Parapet Wall Copings: , 1. Fabricate coping similar to Figure 3-4E in SMACNA manual. 2. Fabricate standing seam cross joints similar to Figure 3 -3, #22 in SMACNA manual. 3. Fabricate 6" wide joint back -up plates and butt cross joints, similar to Figure 3 -3, #20 in SMACNA manual. 4. Fabricate drive seam cross joints similar to Figure 3 -2, #7 in SMACNA manual. 5. Shop drill holes 1/8" larger than fastener at 24" on center to anchor coping on roof side. 6. Fabricate continuous cleats to anchor coping at exterior side. 7. Shop miter, seam, and seal joints at coping corners. 8. Fabricate coping from 24 gauge primed and galvanized steel or coil coated steel. ' C. Fabrication of Counterflashing: 1. Fabricate counterflashing similar to Figure 3 -9 in SMACNA Manual. 2. Fabricate counterflashing to cover building from coping to roof, wall reglet to roof, and equipment reglet to roof. 3. Fabricate counterflashing to terminate 1" above roof cant. 4. Fabricate counterflashing with 6" wide backup plate at butt expansion joints at 30' on center. 5. Shop miter, seam, and seal joints at counterflashing corners. 6. Fabricate counterflashing corners to allow for thermal movement of the substrate and sheet metal. 7. Fabricate counterflashing from 24 gauge primed and galvanized steel. D. Fabrication of Roof Penetration Flashing: Fabricate pipe flat roof penetration flashing similar to Figure 4-14B, in SMACNA Manual. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE 1 A. Surface Preparation: 1. Cover substrate surfaces with bituminous felt paper, overlap joints 2 inches minimum. 2. Install paper slip sheet between bituminous felt paper and sheet metal to prevent bonding, overlap joints 2 inches minimum. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Flashing and Sheet Metal Project Number 106244 Page 4 i 3. Turn bituminous felt paper up 6 inches minimum on abutting vertical surfaces. 4. Nail, staple, or adhesive tape apply bituminous felt paper at 6 inche centers on laps and edges. 1 5. Remove debris from reglets prior to installing counterflashing. B. Installation of Parapet Wall Coping: 1. Install tapered wood blocking to slope top of ara et wall coin 1 inch P P coping per foot toward roof. 1 2. Install 6 inch minimum wide back up plates behind coping cross joints spaced at 10 feet on center, maximum. 3. Install sealant between back up plate and coping panel. 4. Lock front edge of coping in continuous cleat. 5. Miter, seam, and seal corners of coping with solder. 1 6. Install screw anchors and neoprene coated washers at 24 inches on center in oversized shop drilled holes on roof side of coping. C. Installation of Counterflashing: 1. Install counterflashing from parapet wall coping and wall reglet to 1 inch ' above roof cant. 2. Provide for thermal movement of counterflashing at corners and joints. 3. Fill exposed joints with elastomeric sealant and concealed joints with ' mastic sealant. D. Installation of Roof Pipe Penetration Flashing: Install two piece lead sheet flashing over vent pipes, 12 inches or less in height above the bonnet flashing. E. Installation of Reglets: Install surface mounted reglets above counterflashing in areas indicated on Drawings. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Site Tests: Demonstrate watertight sheet metal and flashing systems with hose ' and standing water tests, when requested by Architect. B. Adjusting Defective Work: ' 1. Replace or repair and touch-up sheet metal flashing damaged or scratched P P P g g prior to Substantial Completion. ' 2. Fill joint openings with elastomeric sealants. 3. Repair joints which fail to remain water tight during Site tests. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Flashing and Sheet Metal I Project Number 106244 Page 5 I I C. Final Cleaning: I 1. Clean exposed sheet metal prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Remove excess elastomeric sealant from exposed surfaces. I D. Protection of Dissimilar Metals: Provide galvanic protection in areas where dissimilar metals are adjacent to each other. "SECTION END" I I I I • 1 I I I I I I I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07600 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Flashing and Sheet Metal I Project Number 106244 Page 6 07900 ' TOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL ' 1.1 SUMMARY ' A. Section Includes: 1. Elastomeric Sealants. 2. Caulking compounds. 3. Tape Sealants. 4. Sealant backing and surface preparation materials. ' B. Sealant Products Furnished and Installed in other Sections: ' 1. Furnish and install joint sealers as required by other Sections. 2. Refer to sealant schedule at the end of this Section for use of sealants ' based on designed substrate movement, purpose of sealant, and type of substrate for each joint. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Sealant and Caulking: Where the words "sealant" or "caulking" are used in this ' text, they shall be considered to be synonymous and shall mean sealant or caulking compounds as specified in Part 2 Products of this section. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product information on each proposed sealant and backing material. ' B. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1 1. Submit complete, current instructions covering installation of such material intended for use on project. ' 2. Notify Architect when manufacturer's instructions conflict with Contract Documents. ' PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 JOINT SEALANT COLORS ' A. Sealant, Caulk, and Tape Colors: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Joint Sealants ' Project Number 106244 Page 1 • r I 1. Furnish sealant, caulk, and tape for exposed joints in manufacturer's standard color to match adjacent surfaces. 2. Furnish sealant, caulk, and tape for concealed joint in manufacturer's color with the highest elastomeric performance. ' 2.2 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant, ES -1: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade P, self leveling. ' 2. Type: Type S, one component or Type M, two or more components. 3. Composition: Polyurethane. 4. Shore A Hardness: 15 to 45. 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 25 percent. 6. Acceptable Type S Sealants: Chem -Calk 950 by Bostik, Vulkem 45 by MAMECO, Sonolastic SL1 or Sololastic CT1 by Sonneborn, THC- 900/901 by Tremco. 7. Acceptable Polyurethane Type M Sealants: Chem -Calk 550 by Bostik, ' Vulkem 245 or 255by MAMECO, Sikaflex -2CSL by Sika, Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant or Sonolastic Wide Joint Sealant by Sonneborn. 8. Acceptable Polyurethane Coal Tar Extended Fuel Resistant Sealants: '• Gardox by WR Meadows. B. Elastomeric Sealant, ES -2: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Non -sag. 2. Type S, one component or Type M, two or more components. 3. Composition: Polyurethane. 4. Shore Hardness: 15 to 50 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 25 percent. 6. Acceptable Type S Sealants: Chem -Calk 900 by Bostik, Vulkem 116 by MAMECO, Sikaflex-la by Sika, Sonolastic NPI by Sonneborn, Dymonic by Tremco. 7. Acceptable Polyurethane Type M Sealants: Chem -Calk 500 by Bostik, Vulkem 227 or 922 by MAMECO, Sikaflex -2cNS by Sika, Sonolastic NP2 by Sonneborn, Dymeric by Tremco. C. Elastomeric Sealant, ES -3: ' 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Non -sag. 2. Type S, one component. 3. Composition: Polyurethane. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Joint Sealants Project Number 106244 Page 2 4. Shore A Hardness: 15 to 25. 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 50 percent. 6. Minimum Elongation: 700percent 7. Acceptable Polyurethane Type S Sealants: Vulkem 921 by MAMECO, ' Sikaflex -15LM by Sika. D. Elastomeric Sealant, ES-4: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Non -sag. 2. Type S, one component. ' 3. Composition: Low modulus neutral cure silicone. 4. Shore A Hardness: 15 to 20. 5. Joint Movement Range: +100 to -50 percent. 6. Minimum Elongation: 1,200 percent 7. Acceptable Silicone Sealants: 790 by Dow Corning, Sonolastic Omniseal by Sonneborn, Spectrum 1 by Tremco. ' E. Elastomeric c Sealant, ES -5: ' 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Non -sag. 2. Type S, one component or Type M, two components. ' 3. Composition: Silicone, acetoxy or neutral core. 4. Shore A Hardness: 10 to 28. 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 25 to 50 percent. 6. Acceptable Neutral Core Silicone Sealants: Chem -Calk 100 and Chem - Calk N -Cure 2000 by Bostik, 695 or 795 by Dow Corning, Silpruf and Silglaze N by General Electric, Spectrem 2 by Tremco. 7. Acceptable acetoxy Cure Silicone Sealants: Chem -Calk 1200 by Bostik, 999 -A by Dow Corning, Contractors 1000 by General Electric, Sonolastic Omniplus by Sonneborn, Proglaze by Tremco. l F. Elastomeric Sealant, ES-6: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Class 25, Grade NS, Non -sag. 2. Type S, one component. ' 3. Composition: Mildew resistant silicone. 4. Shore A Hardness: 20 to 30. 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 25 percent. ' 6. Acceptable Silicone Sealants: Sanitary 1700 by General Electric, 786 by Dow Corning (for non - porous substrates only). 2.3 CAULKING Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Joint Sealants ' Project Number 106244 - Page 3 r A. Acrylic Caulking, CK -1: 1. Industry Standard for Acrylic Latex Caulking: ASTM C 834. 2. One Component. 3. Composition: Acrylic latex or Acrylic Terpolymer. ' 4. Recovery: 75 percent in accordance with ASTM C 736 5. Joint Movement Range: +/ -7.5 percent 6. Acceptable Acrylic Latex Caulking: Chem -Calk 600 by Bostik, Sonolac by Sonnebom, Acrylic Latex Caulk by Tremco. 7. Acceptable Acrylic Terpolymer Caulking: Mono by Tremco. B. Butyl Caulking, CK -2: 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 808.3. 2. One Component. 3. Composition: Butyl rubber. 4. Joint Movement Range: +/- 5 percent. 5. Acceptable Butyl Rubber Caulking: Chem -Calk 300 by Bostik, Butyl Sealant by Tremco. ' C. Small Joint Caulking, CK -5: 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 803.3. - t 2. One Component. 3. Composition: Non -sag or self leveling acrylic. 4. Shore A Hardness: 45 to 55. 5. Joint Movement Range: +/- 5 percent. 6. Acceptable Self Leveling Caulking: PTI 200 by Protective Treatments. 7. Acceptable Non -Sag Caulking: S -M 5504 by Schnee- Moorehead. 2.4 ACCESSORIES ' A. Cleaning, Priming, and Sealing Materials: 1. Joint Cleaners: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for the joint surface to be cleaned. ' 2. Joint Primers and Sealers: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for the joint surface to be primed and sealed. 3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene or other plastic self - adhesive tape, compatible with sealant, which will not bond to sealant. 4. Solid closed Cell Neoprene Gaskets: Closure Strips by Rubaflex Corp., 1200 Series Dense Neoprene by Williams Products. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Joint Sealants Project Number 106244 Page 4 B. Sealant Backer Rod: ' 1. Composition: Nonabsorptive closed cell polyethylene or open cell polyurethane compressible rod stock, compatible with sealant, which will ' not bond to sealant. 2. Acceptable Backer Rods: Sonofoam by Sonneborn or Ethafoam by Dow Chemical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Conditions: ' 1. Examine joint substrate bstrate to ensure bond breaker materials do not contaminate the substrate and substrate materials are secure. 2. Prior to installation, verify that joint dimensions are within tolerance established by sealant, tape, and caulking manufacturers. U 3. Installation of sealant, tape, and caulking materials will be interpreted as acceptance of substrate surfaces within each joint. B. Protection: I _ 1. Protect adjacent exposed surfaces from contact with sealant and caulking materials. 2. Cover adjacent substrate surfaces with temporary removable adhesive tape prior to sealing joints with gun grade elastomeric sealants. ' C. Surface Preparation: 1. Clean, prime, and seal joints surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. ' 2. Support sealant from back with construction indicated or support with joint filler or backer rod where recommended by sealant manufacturer. 3. Install backer rod with blunt or rounded tools to prevent puncturing the ' rod. 4. Install open cell backer rods at least 50 percent oversized and as recommended by manufacturer. ' 5. Install closed cell backer rods at least 33 percent oversized and as recommended by manufacturer. 6. Install expanding tape sealant TS -5 behind backer rod at vertical expansion joints in exterior concrete and masonry walls during wet weather when required to provide temporary joint closure. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. joint Sealants Project Number 106244 Page 5 i D. Installation Procedures: 1 1. Comply with sealant and caulking manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Seal or caulk joints between dissimilar materials for watertight seal. 3. Provide watertight caulked joints at building exterior locations where possible water penetration through joint may occur. 4. If caulking systems for such joints has not been shown, provide as specifically approved. 5. Install elastomeric sealants in concrete foot traffic joints to size and shape indicated or with slightly concave surface and depth equal to 75 percent of normal joint width, but not more than 5/8" and not less than 3/8 inches deep. 6. Install nonelastomeric sealants to size and shape indicated or with slightly concave surface and depth from 75 percent to 125 percent of normal joint width. 1 7. Install elastomeric sealants in nontraffic joints to size and shape indicated, with slightly concave surface and depth equal to 50 percent of normal joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch and not less than 1/4 inch. 8. Install elastomeric sealant materials in accordance with recommendations in ASTM C 920. 9. Use sealant color to match adjacent surfaces, except where a specific color is specified in the adjacent finish product specification or indicated on Drawings. 3.2 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Joints: 1. Replace materials improperly installed. 2. Replace sealant materials at moving joints with cohesive or adhesive failure. B. Daily Cleaning: 1. Remove temporary adhesive tape from edge of exposed joints after tooling. 2. Remove excess sealant material. 3. Remove adhesive retained on exposed surfaces after application and 111 removal of temporary adhesive tape. "SECTION END" , Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 07900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Joint Sealants Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 1 08410 ' ALUMINUM ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY • ' A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum entrance doors with complete hardware 2. Aluminum entrance framing systems, fasteners, anchors, and attachment devices. 3. Accessories necessary to complete work. 1.2 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Design Requirements: 1. Drawings are diagrammatic and do not purport to identify nor solve problems of thermal or structural movement, glazing, anchorage, or • moisture disposal. ' 2. Requirements shown by details are intended to establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members. 3. Provide concealed fastening. ' 4. Provide entrance and storefront systems, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts. 5. Attachment considerations are to take into account site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening or fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves. 6. Anchors, fasteners and braces shall be structurally stressed not more than 50% of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied. 7. Provide for -expansion and contraction without detriment to appearance or performance. ' 8. Assemblies shall be free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. 9. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building - elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system. ' B. Performance Requirements: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 1 1. Air infiltration: Air leakage through fixed light areas of storefront shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of surface area when tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at differential static pressure of 6.24 psf. 2. Water infiltration: No uncontrolled water penetration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 331 at test pressure of 10.0psf. C. Thermal Requirements: 1. Framing systems shall accommodate expansion and contraction movement due to surface temperature differentials of 180 degrees Fahrenheit without causing buckling, stress on glass, failure of joint seals, excessive stress on structural elements, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. 2. Thermal Transmittance: Provide framing systems that have an overall U- value of not more than 0.65 BTU /(hr. x sq ft. x deg. F) at 15 mph exterior wind velocity when tested in accordance with AAMA 1503. 3. Ensure doors function normally within limits of specified temperature range. 1 D. Structural Requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI /ASTM E330: 1. Wind loads for exterior assemblies: a. Basic loading: b. 15 psf acting inward. c. 15 psf acting outward. d. 20 psf within 10 feet of building corners. 2. Deflection: Maximum calculated deflection of any framing member in direction normal to plane of wall when subjected to specified design pressures shall not exceed 1/175 of its clear span. 1 E. Testing Requirements: Provide components that have been previously tested by an independent testing laboratory. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01300. B. Product Data: 1 1. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and product specifications. 2. Include information for factory finishes, hardware, accessories and other required components. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 ' C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings covering fabrication, installation and finish of ' specified systems. 2. Include following: a. Fully dimensioned plans and elevations with detail coordination keys. b. Locations of exposed fasteners and joints. 3. Provide detailed drawings of: ' a. Composite members. b. Joint connections for framing systems and for entrance doors. c. Anchorage. 1 d. Expansion and contraction provisions. e. Hardware, including locations, mounting heights, reinforcements ' and special installation provisions. f. Glazing methods and accessories. g. Internal sealant requirements as recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Test Reports: 1. Standard Systems: Submit certified copies of previous test reports - substantiating performance of system in lieu of re- testing. Include other ' supportive data as necessary. E. Certificates: ' 1. Submit manufacturer's facturer s certification stating that systems are in compliance ' with specified requirements. F. Qualification Data: 1 1. Submit installer qualifications verifying years of experience. 2. Include list of projects having similar scope of work identified by name, location, date, reference name and phone number. G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed installation instructions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: g p tY : Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center �o Section 08410 Mildren Design Group,P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts _ 1 Project Number 106244 Page 3 1 1. To ensure quality of appearance and performance, obtain materials for each system from either a single manufacturer or from manufacturer approved by each system manufacturer. B. Installer Qualifications: Certified in writing by Contractor as q ualified for installation of specified systems. C. Perform Work in accordance with AAMA SFM -1 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1 D. Conform to requirements of ANSI A117.1 and local amendments. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Comply with requirements of Section 01600. 1 B. Protect finished surfaces as necessary to prevent damage. C. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which become firmly bonded when exposed to sun. D. Do not leave coating residue on an surfaces. g Y E. Replace damaged units. 1.6 WARRANTY 1 A. Provide warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Provide written manufacturer's warranty, executed by company official, warranting against defects in materials and products for 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. Warrant door comer construction for the life of the project. C. Provide written installer's warranty, warranting work to be watertight, free 1 from defective materials, defective workmanship, glass breakage due to defective design, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty shall cover following: a. Complete watertight and airtight system installation within specified tolerances. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 b. Completed installation will remain free from rattles, ttles, wind whistles ' and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure. c. System is structurally sound and free from distortion. ' d. Glass and glazing gaskets will not break or "pop" from frames due to design wind, expansion or contraction movement. e. Glazing sealants and gaskets will remain free from abnormal 1 deterioration or dislocation due to sunlight, weather or oxidation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS ' A. Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products by one of the following: 1. United States Aluminum, 200 Singleton Drive, Waxahachie, Texas 75165; (972) 937 -9651 (voice); (972) 937 -0405 (data). 1 2. KawneerCompany, Inc., 555 Guthridge Court, Norcross, GA 30092; (770) 449 -5555 ' . B. Substitutions: Submit under provisions of Section 01600. C. Acceptable Entrance Doors: 1. Stiles: 3-1/2 inches. 2. Top Rail: 3-3/16 inches. ' 3. Bottom Rail: 9 -1/2 inches. 4. Glazing Infill: 1/4 inch. D. Acceptable Storefront Framing Systems: 1. Framing System: Thermo -Set, Series FT451. 2. Face Width: 1 -3/4 inches. 3. Back Member Depth: 2 -5/8 inches. ' 4. Overall Depth: 4-1/2 inches. 5. Glazing Infill: 1 inch. 6. Glazing Method: Exterior. ' 7. Thermal Break: Yes. 8. Fabrication: Screw spline system. 2.2 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 - Page 5 1 1 A. Aluminum: 1. ASTM B221, alloy 6063 -T5 for extrusions; ASTM B209, alloy 5005 -H34 for sheets; or other alloys and temper recommended by manufacturer appropriate for specified finish. 1 B. Anchorage Devices: 1. Manufacturer's standard formed or fabricated steel or aluminum assemblies of shapes, plates, bars or tubes. 1 C. Fasteners: 1. Aluminum, non - magnetic stainless steel or other materials warranted by manufacturer to be non - corrosive and compatible with components being fastened. 1 2. Do not use exposed fasteners. 3. For concealed locations, provide manufacturer's standard fasteners. 4. Provide nuts or washers of design having means to prevent disengagement; deforming of fastener threads is unacceptable. D. Expansion Anchor Devices: Lead - shield or toothed'steel, drilled -in, expansion bolt anchors. E. Protective Coatings: Cold- applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC -Paint 1 12, compounded for 30 mil (0.77 mm) thickness for each coat; or alkyd type zinc chromate primer complying with FS TT- P-645. F. Glazing Gaskets: 1. Compression type design, replaceable, molded or extruded, of neoprene, or ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM). 2. Conform to ASTM C509 or C864. 3. Profile and hardness as required to maintain uniform pressure for watertight seal. 4. Provide in manufacturer's standard black color. G. Weatherstripping: 1. Wool pile conforming to AAMA 701.2; or extruded EPDM elastomeric conforming to ASTM C509 or C864. 2. Provide EPDM or vinyl -blade gasket weatherstripping in bottom door rail, adjustable for contact with threshold. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C_ Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts - 1 Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 1 H. Internal Sealants: Types recommended by sealant manufacturer. I. "Anti- Walk" Edge Blocking: "W" shaped EPDM blocks for use in keeping 1 glazing material stationary under vibration or seismic loading. J. Baffles (at weep holes): Type as recommended by system manufacturer and shown in published installation instructions. K. Edge Dams: As recommended and provided by storefront manufacturer. ' L. Sill Pan: As P by rovided b storefront manufacturer. 2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Refer to Section 08800. 2.4 DOOR HARDWARE i j A. Hardware Items: ' 1. Pivot hinges: Offset type with intermediate. 2. Surface closers: Norton 7900 Series with hold open . 3. Panic devices with pulls: Dor -O -Matic 1694 at active leaf, 1691 at inactive ' leaf a. Finish DC 35 4. Thresholds: Pemko, 270A. 1 5. Weatherstripping: Manufacturer's standard. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Coordination of Fabrication: r 1. Check actual frame or door openings required in construction work by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 2. Fabricate units to withstand loads which will be applied when system is in place. B. General: 1. Conceal fasteners wherever possible. 2. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support to structure. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 7 1 1 3. Separate dissimilar metals and aluminum in contact with concrete utilizing protective coating or pre - formed separators which will prevent 1 contact and corrosion. 4. Comply with Section 08800 for glazing requirements. C. Aluminum Framing: 111 1. Provide members of size, shape and profile indicated, designed to provide for glazing from exterior. 2. Fabricate frame assemblies with joints straight and tight fitting. 3. Reinforce internally with structural members as necessary to support design loads. 4. Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles, with hairline fit of contacting members. 5. Seal horizontals and direct moisture accumulation to exterior. 6. Provide flashings and other materials used internally or externally that are corrosive resistant, non - staining, non bleeding and compatible with adjoining materials. 7. Provide manufacturer's extrusions and accessories to accommodate 1 expansion and contraction due to temperature changes without being detrimental to appearance or performance. 8. Make provisions in framing for minimum edge clearance, nominal edge cover and nominal pocket width for thickness and type of glazing or infill used in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer and FGMA Glazing Manual. 9. Provide tight fitting, injection molded, plastic water deflectors at all intermediate horizontals. 1 D. Entrance Doors: 1. Fabricate with mechanical joints using internal reinforcing plates g p tes and shear blocks attached with fasteners and by welding. 2. Provide extruded aluminum glazing stops of square and mitered for single glazing only design, permanently anchored on security side and removable on opposite side. E. Hardware: 1. Receive hardware supplied in accordance with Section 08710 and install 1 in accordance with requirements of this Section. 2. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware. 3. Comply with hardware manufacturer's templates and instructions. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 8 1 4. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. F. Welding: 1. Comply with recommendations of the American Welding Society. 2. Use recommended electrodes and methods to avoid distortion and discoloration. 3. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces; restore mechanical finish. G. Flashings: Form from sheet aluminum with same finish as extruded sections. Apply finish after fabrication. Material thickness as required to suit condition 1 without deflection or "oil- canning ". 2.6 FINISH 1 A. Color Anodized: 1. Conforming to AA- M12C22A and AAMA 608.1. 2. Architectural Class I, etched, medium matte, black, colored anodic coating, 0.7 mil minimum thickness. I - PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 01400. B. Verify dimensions, tolerances and method of attachment with other Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb and level: a. 1/8 inch in 10 feet vertically. b. 1/8 inch in 20 feet horizontally. 2. Limit variations from theoretical locations: 1/4 inch for any member at any location. 3. Limit offsets in theoretical end -to -end and edge -to -edge alignment: 1/16 inch from flush surfaces not more than 2 inches apart or out-of -flush by 1 more than 1/4 inch. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 I Mildren Design Group, P.C. Project Number 106244 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Page 9 1 B. Install doors and hardware in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 1 C. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frame. D. Anchor securely in place, allowing for required movement, P g q t, including expansion and contraction. E. Separate dissimilar materials at contact points, including metal in contact with masonry or concrete surfaces, with bituminous paint or pre- formed separators to prevent contact and corrosion. F. Seal perimeter members as shown on manufacturer's installation instructions or as required for unique job conditions. Set other members with internal sealants and baffles as called for in manufacturer's installation instructions. Use sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer. J G. Glazing: Refer to requirements of Section 08800. Utilize "anti- walk" edge blocking on all vertical edges of glazing. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Test door operating functions. Adjust closing and latching speeds and other hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to ensure smooth operation. 3.4 SIGNAGE 1 A. Post sign on the egress side on or adjacent to the main exit door stating: "THIS DOOR TO REMAIN UNLOCKED WHEN BUILDING IS OCCUPIED ". B. Sign shall be in letter 1 inch high on a contrasting background. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean surfaces in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations; remove J excess mastic, mastic smears, foreign materials and other unsightly marks. 1. Clean entrance doors, storefront frames, and entrance door frames, and ' exterior glass framing systems on interior and exterior. 2. Remove excess sealants. 3. Wash and wipe dry glazing prior to Substantial Completion. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 10 B. Clean metal surfaces exercising care to avoid damage. 1 3.6 COMPLETION I A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Remove and replace damaged components. 2. Apply touch -up paint to scratched exposed aluminum components. "SECTION END" 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate � te Canes' Section 08410 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts Project Number 106244 Page 11 1 08800 GLAZING PART 1- GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: 1. Primary glass. 2. Processed glass. 3. Insulated glass. 4. Glazing accessories. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, windloads and impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction. 2. Provide glass products in the thicknesses and strengths (annealed or heat - treated) - required to meet or exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in- service conditions per ASTM E1300. a. Minimum thickness of annealed or heat - treated glass products is selected, so the worst -case probability of failure does not exceed the following: (1) 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically or not over 15 degrees from the vertical plane and under wind action. (2) 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical plane and under action of wind and/or snow. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product information on insulated glass systems and glazing accessories including test reports for thermal resistance. B. Glazing contractor shall obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant re manufacturer, indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant, as well as other glazing materials including insulating units. C. Samples: Pacific Crossroads Corporate d rp Center Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glazing _ Project Number 106244 Page 1 j 1 1. Submit one 12" x 12" sample of each type and color of glass. 2. Show proposed maximum color range and range of other visual characteristics intended for use on the project. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with State of Oregon, IBC, Chapter 24, and Fire and Life Safety Regulations. 2. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or referenced standards. a. GANA Publications b. AAMA Publications c. IBMA/IGMAC Publications 3. Tempered Glass. a. Provide tempered glazing in doors, entrances, or other traffic areas in accordance with locations defined in U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commissions Standard 16 CFR 1201 C1 and C11. b. Provide label on each piece indicating compliance with ANSI Z 97.1. c. Provide Category I or II glazing in accordance with Table 2406.1 (OSSC) 4. Seismic requirements: Glass in curtain walls, glazed storefronts and glazed partitions shall meet the seismic requirements of ASCE 7, Section 9.6.2.10. and Section 2404.1 (OSSC) 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 A. Comply with manufacturer's instruction for receiving, handling, storing and protecting glass & glazing materials. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. D. Exercise exceptional care to prevent edge damage to glass, and damage /deterioration to 1 coating on glass. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 1.6 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Standard Warranty: 1. Submit 10 year written warranty period during which installation of replacement and materials is included. 2. Submit written warranty agreeing to replace insulating glass units which show deterioration of coatings or colors, or deteriorate in any other manner, due to failure of materials or workmanship, for 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion. After initial 10 year replacement period, furnish F.O.B. jobsite. 3. Submit written warranty agreeing to repair or replace glass and glazing materials which fail to perform as specified, including leakage of water; or failure in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion, resistance, weather resistance, or general durability; or deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified by submitted manufacturer's data as an inherent quality of the material for the exposure indicated. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Pilkington 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: 1. Insulating Glass Unit Makeup: a. Outboard Lite: (1) Glass Type: "SuperGrey" Glass (2) Glass Tint: Grey (3) Nominal Thickness: 1/4 inch (4) Glass Strength: Heat Strengthened or Tempered (5) Coating Orientation: Second surface (2) b. Spacer: (1) Nominal Thickness: / inch (2) Gas Fill: Air c. Inboard Lite (1) Glass Type: "Energy Advantage" (2) Coating: Low -E (3) Glass Tint: Clear • Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. . Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 3 (4) Nominal Thickness: 1 /4 inch (5) Glass Strength: Annealed (6) Coating Orientation: Third surface (3) 2. Performance Characteristics (Center of Glass) a. Visible Transmittance: 7 percent 1 b. Winter U- factor (U- value): 0.33 c. Shading Coefficient: 0.17 d. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.14 3. Provide hermetically sealed IG units with dehydrated airspace, dual sealed with a primary seal of polyisobutylene (PIB), or thermo plastic spacer (TPS) and a secondary seal of silicone or an organic sealant depending on the application. 4. Requirements: a. Insulating glass units are certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) to either ASTM E774, or to ASTM E2190, or both. b. Annealed float glass shall comply with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 clear, Quality-Q3. c. Heat - Strengthened float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality Q3, Kind HS. d. Tempered float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 2 1 (tinted), Quality Q3, Kind FT. 5. Glass shall be annealed, heat - strengthened or tempered as required by codes, or as required to meet thermal stress and wind loads. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazin g Sealant, GS-6 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 808.3 1 2. Components: One 3. Composition: Acrylic Polymer. 4. Acceptable Acrylic Sealants: PTI 767 by Protective Treatments, Mono by Tremco. B. Elastomeric Sealant, ES -5 1� 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 920, Type S, class 25, Grade NS. 2. Components: One 3. Grade: Non -sag 4. Composition: Neutral cure or acetoxy cure silicone. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 28. 6. Joint Movement Range: +/- 25 to 50 percent. 7. Acceptable Neutral Cure Silicone Sealants: Chem -Calk 1000 and Chem - Calk N-Cure 2000 by Bostik, 795 by Dow Corning, Silpruf and Silglaze N 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ .Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 by General Electric, c, 864 by Pecora, Rhodorsil 5c and Rhodorsil 6B by I Rhone- Poulenc, Spectrem 2 by Tremco. 8. Acceptable Acetoxy Cure Silicone Sealants: Chem -Calk 1200 by Bostik, 999 -A by Dow Coming, Contractors 1000 by General Electric, 863 by Pecora, Rhodorsil 3B by Rhone- Poulenc, Sonolastic Omniplus by Sonneborn, Proglaze by Tremco. C. Glazing Tape Sealant, GTS -1 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 806.1. 2. Composition: Vulcanized butyl rubber. 3. Spacer Rod: Regular and preshimmed with spacer rod. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 18. 5. Joint Movement Range: =1- 12.5 percent 6. Acceptable Butyl Sealants: PTI 626 by Protective Treatments, SST -800 Tape by Tremco. D. Glazing Tape Sealant, GTS -2: 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 804.1. 2. Composition: Cross linked butyl polyisobutylene.. 3. . Spacer Rod: Regular and preshimmed with spacer rod. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 18. 5. Joint Movement Range: =/- 12.5 percent 6. Acceptable Butyl Polyisobutylene Sealants: PTI 303 by Protective Treatments, 440 Tape and Preshimmed 440 Tape by Tremco j E. Glazing Tape Sealant, GT -3: 1. Industry Standard: AAMA 804. and 807.1.. 2. Composition: Cross linked butyl polyisobutylene.. 3. Spacer Rod: Regular and preshimmed with spacer rod. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 10 to 15. 5. Joint Movement Range: _/- 25 percent 6. Acceptable Butyl Polyisobutylene Sealants: PTI 606 by Protective 1 Treatments. F. Interior Glazing Tape Sealant for Steel Frames, GTS-4: 1. Composition: Medium Density PVC F p ty C oam. 2. Shore Hardness Range: 25. 3. Adhesive: One side. 4. Acceptable Tape Sealants: V -780 by Norton Sealants. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center rP° Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 5 PART 3- EXECUTION 1 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification and Conditions: 1. Performance 1 a. Verify that site conditions are acceptable for installation of the glass. b. Verify openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. c. Verify that a functioning weep system is present. d. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed e. Do not proceed with glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protection: 1. Handle and store product according to manufacturers' recommendations. B. Surface Preparation 1. Clean and prepare glazing channels and other framing members to receive glass. 2. Remove coatings and other harmful materials that will prevent glass and glazing installation required to comply with performance criteria specified. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1 A. Install products using the recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in the "GANA Glazing Manual ". B. Verify that Insulating Glass (IG) Unit secondary seal is compatible with glazing sealants. C. Install glass in prepared glazing channels and other framing members. D. Install setting blocks in rabbets as recommended by referenced g y e erenced glazing standards in GANA Glazing Manual and IGMA Glazing Guidelines. E. Provide bite on lass, minimum edge and face clearances and glazing g g g ing matenal tolerances 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 6 1 1 recommended by GANA Glazing Manual. 1 F. Provide weep system as recommended by GANA Glazing Manual. G. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow and similar characteristics. H. Distribute the weight of the glass unit along the edge rather than at the corner. I. Comply with manufacturer's and referenced industry recommendations on expansion joints and anchors, accommodating thermal movement, glass openings, use of setting blocks, edge, face and bite clearances, use of glass spacers, edge blocks and installation of weep systems. J. Protect glass from edge damage during handling and installation. K. Prevent glass from contact with contaminating substances that result from construction . operations such as weld spatter. L. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked or damaged in any way. 3.4 COMPLETION 1 A. Adjusting Defective Work: Replace broken or damaged glazing panels prior to Substantial Completion. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application, using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. 2. Remove labels, clean paint and sealant smears and spots with solvents as approved by manufacturer. a. Do not use scrapers or other metal tools to clean glass. 3. Wash each side of glass and wipe dry prior to Substantial Completion. SECTION END 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 08800 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Glazing Project Number 106244 Page 7 09900 PAINTING PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes Exterior Painting: 1. Primed Steel 2. Galvanized Steel. 1 3. HVAC and electrical equipment not factory finished. 4. Rooftop HVAC equipment, factory finished. 5. Concrete. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Color Requirements: 1. Provide exterior paint in light tinted colors as selected by Architect. 2. Colors indicated are selected for design only, and are not intended to limit other acceptable paint manufacturers from matching the selected color. 1 1.3 SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturer's literature on each finish material proposed for this project. 2. Include finish material manufacturer's recommended minimum dry film thickness for each finish system. 3. Obtain review of product data from Architect prior to ordering finish materials. B. Color, Gloss, and Texture Samples: 1. Submit one 8 -1/2" by 11" sample of each color, g loss, and texture for opaque finishes. 2. Resubmit finish samples as requested by Architect until required color, gloss, and texture is achieved. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Field Samples: Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Painting Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1 1. On actual building components, duplicate finishes on acceptable color, gloss, and texture samples. 2. Provide canopy finishes on 10 square feet of in -place surfaces. 3. Acceptable field samples may be incorporated into Work. 4. Finished surfaces will be evaluated in comparison to acceptable submitted samples. • 5. Prior to starting Project Work, adjust field sample colors as directed by Architect at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Standards: 1. Submit Affidavit from Paint Manufacturer's architectural service representative that work shall be in accordance with pertinent recommendations of "Painting Specification Manual for the Pacific Northwest ", as published by the Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA). 2. Each container shall bear manufacturer's legible label indicating: a. Manufacturer's name. b. Type of material. c. Product number. d. Batch number. e. Color. f. Instructions for reducing. g. Instructions for application. _ 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS: 1 A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Perform work only under the following conditions, unless otherwise instructed by manufacturer. 1. Perform work only under the following g conditions, unless otherwise instructed by the manufacturer: a.. Maximum Relative Humidity: 85 percent b. Minimum Dew Point Variance between Air and Surface Temperature: 5 degrees F. c. Minimum Ambient Air and Surface Temperature during application and until film is dry-hard thereafter: (1) At epoxy coatings: 70 degrees F. (2) At urethane coatings: 70 degrees F. (3) Elsewhere: 45 degrees F. C. Do not paint: 1 Pad& Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. - Paintin _ Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 • 1. Over dirt, rust, blistered paint, grease, wet substrates, or surface conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 2. Where inclement weather may damage coating surface. 3. With less that 30 foot candles of available light measured 3 feet above adjacent ground or floor. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: 1. Deliver extra finish paint equal to 5 %, to the nearest allon , on each g color and gloss used. 2. Do not exceed 5 gallons of each color and gloss. 3. Do not provide less than 1 gallon of each color and gloss. 4. Deliver extra paint in unopened containers. 5. Label each container with product identification and use location. 6. Keep list of paint delivered and submit with Operations Manual. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Products for each general purpose shall be of same manufacturer. Do not use products of different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats specified in other sections. B. Products shall be free of lead and mercury and must comply with Federal VOC requirements. C. Products shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free of blemishes or sags. D. Products shall not exceed code- required flame- spreads or smoke - developments. 2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL PRETREATMENT MATERIAL A. Manufacturer & Brand: Amchem Galva prep, p ep, or approved. 2.3 OTHER COATINGS A. Products listed below in Paint Schedule shall comply with latest edition of Approved Products List published by Master Painters Institute (MPI). Copies can be obtained from 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Painting Project Number 106244 . Page 3 1 1 Institute at (888) 674 -8937, or they can be viewed by Computer at www.paintinfo.com and clicking -on either "Product Index Alphabetical" or "Product Index by MPI Number ". 1 2.4 MANUFACTURERS: A. Except for specific products stipulated above, only those manufacturers s who maintain a full -time local or regional architectural representative are approved for use on this Project. These are: 1. Tnemec Coatings 2. Approved substitution. B. Products shall meet or exceed VOC and Chemical Component limits of Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design (LEED) Green Seal GS -11 requirements, including the following: 1. Maximum VOC Content: a. Flat & Eggshell Waterborne Latex (Acrylic) Emulsion Paint: 50 grams/liter b. Semi -gloss & Gloss Waterborne Latex (Acrylic) Emulsion Paint: 150 grams/liter c. Oil -based Paint: 380 grams/liter d. Waterborne Epoxy: 200 grams /liter e. Water -based Polyurethane Transparent Stain: 170 grams/liter - 2. Maximum Aromatic Hydrocarbon Content: a. Oil -based Paint: 10% 3. Minimum Post - consumer Recycled Content: a. For Exterior Use: 90% b. For Light Colors: 50% 4. Maximum Biocide Content: 0.025% 2.5 COLORS A. See specification sections for interior and exterior painting. B. Manufacturers listed in approved products list are approved provided they can supply colors that match scheduled colors to Architect's satisfaction. 2.6 MIXING & TINTING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1� B. Unless otherwise instructed by manufacturer, deliver coatings factory-mixed to jobsite. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group P.C. Painting Project Number 106244 Page 4 1 C. Job -mix and job -tint only when required by manufacturer. D. Mix only in clean, rust - resistant containers. E. Use tinting colors recommended by coating manufacturer. F. Where thinner is used, do not exceed coating manufacturer's recommendations. Do not 1 use kerosene or organic solvents to thin water -based coatings. 2.7 MATERIALS A. Acceptable Paints: 1. Paint numbers listed in the List of Paints published in Painting and Decorating Contractors of America Manual are acceptable for this project. 2. Other products by manufacturer's listed above may be used when acceptable to the Architect. B. Exterior Cleaners, Sealers, Primers, and Undercoats: 1. Cleaners: a. Painter to verify painting system compatible with bond breaker. b. Remove bond breaker film with sand blast or power wash prior to application ofjoint sealants and w ater repellents and final coatings. 2. Sealers: Petroleum Solvent Penetrating Sealer: ProSoCo Weather Seal 201 -GP. 3. Galvanized Wash Treatment: SSPC -SP1. C. Exterior Primers: 1. Zinc Chromate Primer: FS TT- P -645G, Fuller -O -Brien 621 -08 2. Alkyd Steel Primer: Miller 468, Sherwin - Williams B50 N2 or E41 N1, Benjamin Moore M07. 3. Galvanized Metal Primer: Miller 6023, Sherwin - Williams B50 Al, Benjamin Moore M04. 4. Epoxy Metal Primer: Tnemec Epoxoline 66 -1211. 5. Zinc Dust, Zinc Oxide Primer: FS TT- P -641G, Benjamin Moore M -18. 6. Concrete: Cleaners: a. Painter to verify painting system compatible with bond breaker. b. Remove bond breaker film with sand blast or power wash prior to application ofjoint sealants and water repellents and final coatings. 7. Primer /Sealer:Latex Block Filler: Miller 6015, Sherwin - Williams B25 W1, Benjamin Moore 285. Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center �° Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Painting 1 Project Number 106244 Page 5 1 D. Exterior Opaque Paints: 1. Alkyd: a. Alkyd Gloss Enamel, Low Solvent Emissions: Kelly Moore 1225. b. Alkyd Gloss Maintenance Enamel: Sherwin - Williams B53, Benjamin Moore M -22. c. Alkyd Semi -gloss Exterior Enamel: Miller 6750, Sherwin - Williams A2, Benjamin Moore M -24. 2. Aluminum: a. Oil Aluminum Paint: Miller 472, Sherwin Williams B -59 S3, Benjamin Moore M- 20/78. b. Silicone Alkyd Aluminum Paint: Sherwin Williams B -59 S8, Benjamin Moore M- 64/78. 3. Silicone Alkyd: Miller 6590, Sherwin Williams B56(TT- E- 490E), Benjamin Moore M -21 4. Concrete: Elastomeric Coating: (15 mil dry film thickness required.) a. Sonneborn Flex Coat (Textured) b. Miller Acrilastic, Milastic 15 (Textured) c. Benjamin Moore, Moorlastic 060 (Textured) 1 E. Canopies: 1. Hi Build Tnemec Gloss. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be 1 applied. 2. Correct conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. 3. Start of painting work will be interpreted as acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area and painter shall bear all costs to produce acceptable work, including re- painting entire surfaces. 1 B. Protection: 1. Cover or otherwise protect work of other trades, including walls, storefronts and exterior surfaces. 2. Remove prefinished items or provide surface applied protection for machined 1 surfaces, finish cover plates, door hardware, lighting fixtures, and other prefinished 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Painting Project Number 106244 - Page 6 1 items in place and not scheduled for field finishing. ' 3. Cover and protect finished metal, including anodized aluminum. 4. Cover and protect moving parts of operating units and equipment identification, including wiring diagrams, performance ratings, name plates, and code- related labels. 5. Remove protective covers and reinstall removed items after finishing adjacent surfaces. 6. Minimum ambient air and surface temperature unless otherwise approved by manufacturer: 60 degrees for 24 hours before, during and 24 hours after application. C. Surface Preparation: 1. General: Remove any loose material, dirt, dust, or foreign matter. a. Touch -up shop primed items where prime finish is damaged prior to field finishing. b. Comply with coating manufacturer's instructions for cleaning of each substrate. c. Prime exposed metal. 1 d. Apply prime coat to fabricated items which have not been prime coated by fabricator. 2. Zinc Alloy & Galvanized Steel: a. Thoroughly clean with solvent or pressure -wash with detergent in hot water. b. Etch metal with metal conditioner or in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Specifications. 3. All other Non - galvanized Ferrous Metal: a. Remove any rust, grease, oil, or loose scale. 4. Aluminum: a. Etch with phosphoric acid, or approved. 5. Concrete: a. Remove excess form oil and curing compound. b. Pressure wash existing exterior surfaces to remove bond breaker and receive paint. c. Where necessary for coating- adhesion, etch concrete with muriatic acid solution. Following treatment, rinse thoroughly and dry. d. Allow concrete to cure at least 60 days prior to painting. 6. Surfaces to receive epoxy enamel: a. Follow coating manufacturer's instructions. 3.2 COATING APPLICATION A. General: 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center � Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Painting Project Number 106244 Page 7 • II 1 1. Follow coating manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply initial coating until surface moisture content is within limitations I recommended by coating manufacturer. Where in doubt test with moisture meter. 3. Except as otherwise specified hereunder, apply coatings with suitable brush, roller, or spray equipment recommended by coating manufacturer. 4. Back -roll or brush -in spray - applied primer coats to assure coating penetration. 5. Maintain brushes, rollers, and spray equipment clean, free from contaminates, and suitably prepared for conditions of use. 6. Do not exceed coating manufacturer's specified coating application rate. 7. Follow coating manufacturer's recommended drying time between succeeding I coats. 8. Apply finish coats smooth, free ofbrush marks, streaks, laps, coating pile -up, and skips. , 9. Leave any moldings and ornaments clean, true to detail, and without excessive coating build -up in corners and depressions. 10. Where coating abuts other materials or colors cut coating edge clean, sharp, and with no overlap. 11. Tint each coat progressively lighter to enable confirmation of coat quantities. 12. Sand and dust between each coat to provide anchor for succeeding coats, and to remove any defects visible from 36 inch minimum distance. B. Painted Work: _ • I 1. Flat metalwork: apply paint with roller or airless spray equipment only. Do 1 not apply by brush. 2. Roller - applied high -build coatings: Do not "move" paint with roller, or stop rolling prior to roller going dry. Remove roller marks by back - rolling, using minimum possible pressure, and rolling in 1 direction only. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1 A. Immediately following application, wet film thickness of coatings may be tested in compliance with ASTM D -4414. B. After 14 calendar days following application, Coatings may be tested as follows: al 1. In compliance with ASTM D -4138, dry film paint thicknesses may be measured using a Mark II Tooke Coating Inspection Gage, or a similar precision instrument, designed for measuring paint coating thicknesses. touch -up test surface, which will measure approximately 1 sq. inch per test. 2. In compliance with ASTM D -3359 Tape Test, coating adhesion may be determined. 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Painting Project Number 106244 - Page 8 ' 1 1 C. Recoat any work which fails test. 3.4 WASTE MANGEMENT A. In accordance with waste management plan as required: 1. Surplus Paint: Set aside for Owner's reuse or donate to organization such as Habitat for Humanity. 2. Partly -used Paint Containers: Tightly -seal and store in protected, well - ventilated, fire -safe area maintained at moderate temperature, and designated for hazardous materials 3. Do not dispose of coatings or solvents by pouring on ground, into toilets, or into storm drains. Place in suitable containers for proper disposal. 3.5 PRODUCT CLEANING & REPAIRING A. Remove any spills, splatters, and stains including those p � P g se in paint storage and mixing I room. B. Unless otherwise approved, refinish entire surface where portion of coating is unacceptable. C. Including work of other trades, clean, repair and touch -up, or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored, or damaged by work of this section. D. Remove debris from project site upon work completion, or sooner if directed. E. Daily Cleaning: 1 1. At end of day's work, take all necessary precautions to prevent fires. 2. Upon completion of each days work, remove all staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site, remove all paint spots, oil or stains caused to adjacent surfaces and leave job clean and acceptable. 3.6 PROTECTING COMPLETED WORK 1 A. Post Si and install Barricades where necessary to protect ary p otect Completed Work of this Section against damage and discoloration. SECTION END" I I Pacific Crossroads Corporate rP Center Section 09900 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Painting Project Number 106244 Page 9 • 1 1 09941 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE 4.1 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Iron and Steel, Gloss: 1. Shop Coat by Fabricator: Series 90 -97 Tnemec -Zinc. (2.5 -3.5 mils) 2. First Coat: Series N -69 Hi -Build Epoxoline (2.0 -3.0 mils) (additional coats may be required to achieve hiding) 3. Third Coats: Series 74 Endura - Shield (2.0 -5.0 mils) B. Hot Stacks, Piping, Conduit, and Tanks, Not Galvanized, 150 degrees F. Maximum, Semigloss: 1. Prime Coat: Alkyd Steel Primer, 2 mils dft/coat. 2. Second and Third Coat: Alkyd Semigloss Exterior Enamel, 2 mils dit /coat C. Prefinished Coil Coated Metal Panels, Touch -up: 1. Shop Finish By Fabricator: Coil Coated Finish System. 2. Touch -up Coat: ' Spray apply 70 percent Kynar _500 resin coating in matching color, with coating furnished by coil coat manufacturer. D. Concrete Walls, Flat: 1. First Coat: Acriylic Modified Masonry Primer 2. Second and Third Coat: Textured Elastomeric Coating (15 dry mil thickness required.) 1 4.2 EXTERIOR COLOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. P -1 Miller, #8233M, "Crisp Khaki" B. P -2 Color to match brick surface (Color to be selected by architect). "SECTION END" 1 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 09941 ' Mildren Design Group, P.C. Exterior Painting Schedule Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 10523 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS PART 1- GENERAL 1 1.1 SUMMARY 1 A. Section Includes: Fire Extinguishers. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers product information of extinguishers. 2. Indicate capacity and U.L. rating for each type of extinguisher. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS 1 A. Fire Extinguishers: 1. Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical: 5 pound capacity, U.L. Rating 2A -10BC. 1 PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguishers are to be installed. B. Installation of Fire Extinguishers: 1. Travel distance not to exceed 75'. 2. Coordinate location with Fire Marshall. 3. Install wall mounted fire extinguishers on wall bracket mounted 48" above the finished floor. 4. Provide required wall decals as required by governing jurisdiction. 3.2 COMPLETION Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 10523 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Fire Extinguishers j Project Number 106244 Page 1 1 1 A. Cleanup: Remove excess materials from Site. 1 "SECTION END" • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 10523 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Fire Extinguishers Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 10950 MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES PART 1- GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Painted handicapped access parking stall signs. P g gns. 2. Bicycle Racks 3. Knox Box. 1 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's standard product information. B. Shop Drawings: I * 1. Submit shop drawings to indicate sign locations, fabrication methods, mounting-heights, and sign copy and letter style, size, and spacing. 2. Submit shop drawings to indicate layout and anchorage. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 PAINTED METAL SIGNS A. Parking Stall Handicapped Access Signs: 1. Engraving Stock: 0.125 inches thick, 6 inches square. 2. White device on blue background. 3. Painted or engraved with international accessibility symbol in accordance with ANSI117.1. 4. Mounting Method: Plaque security bolted to 2 inch diameter galvanized steel post. 5 2.2 BICYCLE RACKS A. Creative Pipe, Inc. #TB3, with embedded anchor mount. Color to be selected by ' Architect. (Provide 3) Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 10950 Mildren Design Group, P.C. _ Miscellaneous Specialties Project Number 106244 - Page 1 • 1 B. Life Rax, The Wave, #WVE -3, with embedded anchor mount. Color to be selected by Architect. 1 2.3 KNOX BOX : (Provide 3) Model 3200. Locate as per instruction by Fire Marshall) PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 PERFORMANCE 1 A. Installation of Parking Stall Signs: 1. Install one each handicapped access parking stall sign at each handicapped parking stall. 2. Set sign post plumb to vertical in concrete with sign approximately 4 feet above adjacent grade, or as indicated on drawings. B. Installation of Bicycle Rack: 1. Set rack plumb in concrete. 1 2. Powder coat paint rack to match building base color as directed by Architect. 3.2 COMPLETION 1 A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1 1. Touch up and refinish scratched or dented finish on exposed surfaces. 2. Relocate misplaced or misaligned signs. 3. Replace defective or damaged sign components prior to Substantial Completion B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed surfaces per manufacturer's recommendations prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Clean signs within 7 days prior to Substantial Completion. "END OF SECTION" 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Section 10950 Mildren Design Group, P.C. Miscellaneous Specialties - Project Number 106244 Page 2 1 1 1 1 1 Appendix 1 This report was not propared by or for the Mildren Design Group, P.C.. It is solely the product of product Soil Solutions, Mildren Design Group, P.C. makes no warranty of the accuracy or completeness of the report. It is provided for information only. It is . not a part of the Contract Documents. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Geotechnical Investigation Pacific Crossroads Corporate rp Center 1 Tigard, Oregon Prepared for: Cedar Hills Development, LLC. 1 Portland, Oregon July 10, 2007 1 1 1 1 1 SOIISOLhLIOflS 3915 SW Plum Street ' Portland, OR 97219 P: 503- 816 -3689 F: 503- 285 -1636 1 1 1 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS I 1.0 GENERAL INFORMATION 3 2.0 SITE CONDITIONS 3 I 2.1 Surface Conditions 3 2.2 Regional Geology 3 2.3 Field Explorations and Surfaces Conditions 3 I 2.3.1 Field Explorations 3 2.3.2 Surface Conditions 3 2.3.3 Groundwater 3 1 3.0 GEOTECHNICAL DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS 4 3.1 Foundation 4 I 3.2 Floor Slabs 4 3.3 Retaining Walls 5 3.4 Seimic Design 6 I 3.5 Pavement Design 7 4.0 CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS 7 4.1 Site Preparation 7 I 4.1.1 Proof Rolling 7 4.1.2 Wet Soil Conditions • 7 4.1.3 Test Pit Backfilling g I 4.2 Excavation 8 4.3 Structural Fills 8 4.3.1 Native Soils 8 I 4.3.2 Imported Granular Fill 8 4.3.3 Pavement Base Aggregate 8 4.4 Drainage Considerations 8 1 5.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS 9 6.0 LIMITATIONS 9 1 SUPPORTING DATA Appendix 4- Figures Figure 1 Location Plan 1 Figure 2 Site Plan A B — Test Pit Log and Laboratory data 1 1 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 2 7/13/2007 I Cedar Hills Development LLC _ - 1 1 1 1.0 PROJECT AND SITE DESCRIPTIONS Rapid Soil Solutions prepared this geotechnical engineering report for the proposed 1 development of three (3) office buildings in Tigard, Oregon. The project site is shown on Figure 1 in Appendix A. The proposed improvements will include three (3) slab -on- grade 16' tall masonry office building with associated parking. These improvement areas are shown on Figure 2. 2.0 SITE CONDITIONS 1 2.1 Surface Conditions The property is located in a mixed use neighborhood comprised of single- family homes on the north (opposite) side of Pfaffle Street with commercial properties on the south side. The site has two single family residences that will need to be removed along with associated paved areas. The remainder of the site is covered with black berries and tall grasses and shrubs. 2.2 Regional Geology 1 The project site geology Qff (fine- grained sand, silt and clays) is mapped as Pleistocene flood deposits from one or more phases of the glacial outburst floods from Lake Missoula. The thickness of the unit Qff is typically 30 -60ft, with a maximum thickness in the map area . of 180ft.(1) 2.3 Field Exploration and Subsurface Conditions 1 2.3.1 Field Explorations Four test pits were excavated with a track hoe. The location of the test pits are shown on Figure 2 in Appendix A. A registered professional engineer observed the excavation of the pits and logged the subsurface materials. The tests pits were excavated to a depth of 10.0 feet below grade. One large sample of soil was taken from test pit #2 for a resilient modulas R for the pavement design. Test pit logs detailing materials encountered is in Appendix B. The logs were created using the Unified Soil Classification and Visual Manual Procedure (ASTM -D 2488). Samples were transported to the laboratory ACS Testing of Tigard, Oregon for further classification in seal bags. Please see Appendix B for further laboratory results. 2.3.1 Subsurface Conditions The soil conditions were stiff to hard clayey SILT to a depth of 10.0 feet. With moisture contents ranging from 17.2% to 30.1% 1 1 (1) Madin, I P, 1990, Earthquake- Hazard Geology Maps of Portland Metropolitan Area, Oregon, Open File Report 0 -90 -2, Oregon Department of Geology and Mineral Industries 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 3 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC I 1 2.3.2 Groundwater 1 Groundwater was not encountered in test pits. 3.0 GEOTECHNICALI DESIGN RECOMMENDATIONS ' 3.1 Foundation Design The building foundations may be installed on either engineered fill or firm native sub- _ ' grade that is found at a depth of about 2 feet. This depth may be locally variable and I should be confirmed by a geotechnical• engineer or their representative at the time of construction. I Continuous wall and isolated spread footings should be at least 16 and 24 inches wide, respectively. The bottom of exterior footings should be at least 16 inches below the lowest adjacent exterior grade. The bottom of interior footings should be at least 12 1 inches below the base of the floor slab. Footings placed on engineered fill or firm native sub-grade should be designed for an I allowable bearing capacity of 2000 pounds per square foot (psf). The recommended allowable bearing pressure can be doubled for short -term loads such as those resulting from wind or seismic forces. - Based on our analysis the total post - construction settlement is calculated to be less than 1 inch, with differential settlement of less than 0.5 inch over a 50 -foot span for maximum 1 column, perimeter footing loads of less than 100 kips and 6.0 kips per linear foot. Lateral loads on footings can be resisted by passive earth pressure on the sides of the I structures and by friction at the base of the footings. An allowable lateral bearing pressure of 200 pounds per cubic foot (psf/f) below grade may be used. Adjacent floor slabs, pavements or the upper 12 -inch depth of adjacent, unpaved areas should not be I considered when calculating passive resistance. For footings in contact with native soils, lateral sliding 130 psf of resistance may be used. An angle of internal friction of 34 degrees can be used. I If construction is undertaken during wet weather, we recommend a thin layer of compacted, crushed rock be placed over the footing sub-grades to help protect them from disturbance due to the elements and foot traffic: I - 3.2 Floor Slabs . Satisfactory sub -grade support for building floor slabs can be obtained from the native sub- grade prepared in accordance with our recommendations presented below. A 6- inch -thick I. layer of imported granular material 'should be placed and compacted over the prepared sub- grade. Imported granular material should be crushed rock or crushed gravel that is fairly well • graded between coarse and fine, contains no deleterious materials, have a maximum particle 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 4 • 7/13/2007 ' 'Cedar Hills Development LLC I 1 1 size of 1 inch, have less than 5 percent by weight passing the U.S. Standard No. 200 Sieve, and meet OS SC 02630.10 — Dense Graded Aggregate 1 " -0 ". The imported granular material should be placed in 6- inch -thick lifts and compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density as determined by American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) D 1557. A sub -grade modulus of 125 pounds per cubic inch (pci) may be used to design the floor slab. While groundwater was not encountered during our investigation, the water table may rise to t. the level of the slab sub -grade materials during the winter rainy season. For this reason, the ■ installation of a vapor barrier may be warranted in order to reduce the potential for moisture } transmission through, and efflorescence growth on, the floor slabs. Additionally, flooring 1 manufacturers often require vapor barriers to protect flooring and flooring adhesives and will warrant their product only if a vapor barrier is installed according to their recommendations. . The selection and design of an appropriate vapor barrier, if needed, should be based on 1 discussions among members of the design team. 3.3 Retainin g Walls . 1 The retaining wall design recommendations are based on the following assumptions: (1) the walls consist of conventional, cantilevered retaining walls; (2) the walls are less than 8 feet 1 in height; (3) the backfill is drained; and (4) the backfill has a slope flatter than 4H: 1V. Re- evaluation of our recommendations will be required if the retaining wall design criteria for the project varies from these assumptions. 1 Unrestrained site walls that retain native soils should be designed to resist an active equivalent fluid unit weight of 35 pcf where supporting slopes are flatter than 4H: 1V. If 1 retaining walls are restrained from rotation prior to being backfilled, the active equivalent fluid unit weight shall be increased to 50 pcf. For embedded building walls, a superimposed seismic lateral force should be calculated based on a dynamic force of 5H pounds per lineal 1 foot of wall, where H is the height of the wall in feet, and applied at 0.6H from the base of the wall. If other surcharges (e.g., slopes steeper than 4H:1 V, foundations, vehicles, etc.) are located within a horizontal distance from the back of a wall equal to twice the height of the 1 wall, then additional pressures will need to be accounted for in the wall design. Our office should be contacted for appropriate wall surcharges based upon the actual magnitude and configuration of the applied loads. j The wall footings should be designed in accordance with the guidelines provided in the "Foundation Design" section of this report. 1 These design parameters have been provided assuming that back -of -wall drains will be installed to prevent buildup of hydrostatic pressures behind all walls. 1 The backfill material placed behind the walls and extending a horizontal distance equal to at least half of the height of the retaining wall should consist of granular retaining wall backfill as specified in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. Pacific Crossroads CC 5 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC 1 1 1 The wall backfill should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 698. However, backfill located within a horizontal distance of 3 feet from the retaining walls should only be compacted to approximately 92 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 698. Backfill placed within ' 3 feet of the wall should be compacted in lifts less than 6 inches thick using hand- operated tamping equipment (e.g., jumping jack or vibratory plate compactors). If flat work (e.g., sidewalks or pavements) will be placed atop the wall backfill, we recommend that the upper 2 feet of material be compacted to 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 698. A minimum 12- inch -wide zone of drain rock, extending from the base of the wall to within 6 inches of finished grade, should be placed against the back of all retaining walls. Perforated collector pipes should be embedded at the base of the drain rock. The drain rock should meet the requirements provided in the "Structural Fill" section of this report. The perforated collector pipes should discharge at an appropriate location away from the base of the wall. The discharge pipe(s) should not be tied directly into storm water drain systems, unless measures are taken to prevent backflow into the wall's drainage system. Settlements of up to 1 percent of the wall height commonly occur immediately adjacent to the wall as the wall rotates and develops active lateral earth pressures. Consequently, we recommend that construction of flat work adjacent to retaining walls be postponed at least 4 weeks after backfilling of the wall, unless survey data indicates that settlement is complete • prior to that time. 3.4 Seismic Design Criteria We understand that the seismic design criteria for this project is based on the 2006 IBC, Section 1615. The seismic design criteria, in accordance with the 2006 IBC, are summarized in Table 1. Table 1: IBC 2006 Seismic Design Parameters Short Period 1 Second Maximum Credible Earthquake Spectral 1 Acceleration S = 0.77 g S 0.29 g Site Class D Site Coefficient = 1.19 F„ = 1.85 Adjusted Spectral Acceleration SF. = 0.92 g SMI = .51 g Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters SDS = 0.61 g S = 0.34 g Design Spectral Peak Ground Acceleration 0.27 g 1 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 6 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC 1 1 3.5 Pavement Design Our pavement design recommendations are based on the following assumptions: • A sample of soil was taken in the future parking area, see figure 2, the R -value was calculated to be 19, see lab results in Appendix B. I have assumed the following Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESALs) values apply to the proposed street widening at the site: • Parking — 20,000 ESALs Table 2 - Minimum Pavement Sections Traffic Loading 1 ( ESALs) AC (inches) Base Rock (inches) 20,000 4.0 6 of 1 fabric top 2" 3 /4 minus 1 If the project is under taken during the wet weather dependent the sub -grade soil will need to be excavated as it can be covered with rock during that day. The soil on site is moisture sensitive and opening during the wet weather season could possibly lead to an over - excavated section or cement treating, see section 4.1.2 Wet Weather Conditions. The new pavement thicknesses presented above will support both five axle trucks such as moving vans and 75 kip fire trucks. The asphalt 's base rock section is not intended to serve as a construction working surface. Oftentimes such use will result in contaminated bas rock and a soil sub -grade which has - become disturbed. 1 4.0 CONSTRUCTION RECOMMENDATIONS 4.1 Site Preparation Demolition should include removal of existing improvements throughout the project site. Underground utility lines, vaults, basement walls or tanks should be removed or grouted full if left in place. I recommend that soil disturbed during grubbing operations be removed to firm, undisturbed sub - grade. The excavations should then be backfilled with compacted structural fill. On this site only disturb the area in which can be covered with rock during the day. The moisture sensitive clayey SILTY soil when exposed to wet weather becomes soft and yielding. See wet weather conditions below. 1 4.1.1 Proof Rolling Following stripping and prior to placing aggregate base course, pavement the exposed sub -grade should be evaluated by proof rolling. The sub -grade should be proof rolled to identify soft, loose, or unsuitable areas. Please give 24 hour notice to observe the proof rolling. Soft or loose zones identified during the field evaluation should be compacted to an unyielding condition or be excavated and 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 7 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC - I 1 1 replaced with structural fill, as discussed in the Structural Fill section of this 1 report. 4.1.2 Wet Weather Conditions ' The near- surface soils will be difficult during or after extended wet periods when the moisture content of the surface soil is more than a few percentage points above optimum. Soils that have been disturbed during site preparation activities, or soft or loose zones identified during probing or proof rolling, should be removed and replaced with compacted structural fill. Track - mounted excavating equipment will be required during wet weather. The imported granular material should be placed in one lift over the prepared, undisturbed sub -grade and compacted using a smooth drum, non - vibratory roller. If construction is undertaken during the wet weather the builder may choose to cement treat the top ' 12" of sub -grade soil on the site. This will save time over the duration of the project due to the moisture sensitive clayey SILT becoming soft and yielding which will require repeated over excavation and replacement with structural fill. 1 The geo- textile fabric can be eliminated if the sub -grade is cement treated. 4.1.3 Test Pit Backfilling As part of our subsurface exploration, 4 test pits was excavated throughout the site. The test pits were backfilled with the soil spoils from the excavation. Only light tamping and tracking with the excavator was used for compaction of the backfill. During the development of the site, it will be necessary to remove and replace the loose backfill with properly compacted fill. If this is not completed, then consolidation of the test pit backfill may cause settlement of new improvements (pavements). The approximate test pit location is shown on Figure 2. 4.2 Excavation Subsurface conditions of accessible cleared areas of the project site show predominately clayey SILT to the depth explored (10.0 feet). Excavations in the upper soils may be readily accomplished with conventional earthwork equipment with smooth faced bucket. 4.3 Structural Fills Fills should be placed over sub -grade prepared in compliance with Section 4.1 of this report. Material used, as structural fill should be free of organic matter or other unsuitable materials and should meet specifications provided in OSSC, depending upon the 1111 application. A discussion of these materials is in the following sections. 4.3.1 Native Soils Laboratory testing indicates that the moisture content of the near- surface is greater than the optimum moisture content of the soil required for satisfactory compaction. This is depending on the weather conditions at the time of excavation. See section 4.3.2 for imported granular fill. 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 8 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC _ 1 1 4.3.2 Imported Granular Fill The imported granular material must be reasonably well graded to between coarse and fine material and have less than 5% by weight passing the US Standard No.200 Sieve. Imported granular material should be placed in lifts 8 to12 inches and be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density, as determined by 111 ASTM D 698. Where imported granular material is placed over wet or soft soil sub- grades, we recommend that a geo- textile serve as a barrier between the sub - grade and imported granular material. Please supply the engineer with a 5gallon bucket of material 48hours prior to any compaction tests required. 4.3.3 Pavement Base Aggregate Imported base aggregate for roads and parking lots should be clean, crushed rock or crushed gravel. The base aggregate should meet the gradation defined in OSSC 02630.10 — Dense Graded Aggregate 1 1/2 " -0," with the exception that the aggregate should have less than 5% passing a US Standard No. 200 Sieve. The base aggregate should be compacted to at least 95% of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 698. Please supply the engineer with a 5gallon bucket of material 48hours prior to any compaction tests required. 4.4 Drainage Considerations 1 The Contractor shall be made responsible for temporary drainage of surface water and groundwater as necessary to prevent standing water and/or erosion at the working surface. We recommend removing only the foliage necessary for construction to help - minimize erosion. Slope the ground surface around the structures to create a minimum gradient of 2% away from the building foundations for a distance of at least 5 feet. ' Surface water should be directed away from all buildings into drainage swales or into a storm drainage system. 5.0 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATIONS Satisfactory pavement and earthwork performance depends on the quality of construction. Sufficient monitoring of the activities of the contractor is a key part of determining that the , work is completed in accordance with the construction drawings and specifications. I recommend that a geotechnical engineer observe general excavation, stripping, fill placement, and sub - grades in addition to base. Subsurface conditions observed during 1 construction should be compared with those encountered during the subsurface explorations. Recognition of changed conditions requires experience. Therefore, qualified personnel should visit the site with sufficient frequency to detect whether subsurface conditions 1 changes significantly from those anticipated. 6.0 LIMITATIONS • , This report has been prepared for the exclusive use of the addressee, and their architects and engineers for aiding in the design and construction of the proposed development. It is the addressee's responsibility to provide this report to the appropriate design professionals, building officials, and contractors to ensure correct implementation of the recommendations. Pacific Crossroads CC 9 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC 1 officials and contractors to ensure correct implementation of the recommendations. ons. The opinions, comments and conclusions presented in this report were based upon information derived from our literature review, field investigation, and laboratory testing. Conditions between, or beyond, our exploratory borings may vary from those encountered. Unanticipated ' soil conditions and seasonal soil moisture variations are commonly encountered and cannot be fully determined by merely taking soil samples or soil borings. Such variations may result in changes to our recommendations and may require that additional expenditures be made to attain a properly constructed project. Therefore, some contingency fund is recommended to accommodate such potential extra costs. If there is a substantial lapse of time between the submission of this report and the start of work at the site; if conditions have changed due to natural causes or construction operations at, or adjacent to, the site; or, if the basic project scheme is significantly modified from that assumed, it is recommended this report be reviewed to determine the applicability of the conclusions and recommendations. The work has been conducted in general conformance with the standard of care in the field of geotechnical engineering currently in practice in the Pacific Northwest for projects of this nature and magnitude. No warranty, express or implied, exists on the information presented in this ' report. By utilizing the design recommendations within this report, the addressee acknowledges and accepts the risks and limitations of development at the site, as outlined within the report. P ROFF • ��GINF 40( 4 k- • 244 0. • REGON 1 411 • I EXPIRES It — Si —dg Mia Mahedy- Sexton, PE. 1 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 10 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC 1 1 1 1 1 APPENDIX P NDIX A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Pacific Crossroads CC 11 7/13/2007 1 Cedar Hills Development LLC • 1 1 Project Site 6 � - ..,,.,.- Nrir_ � �:y - :tom ,,-.. � f (; A .. _ v �r ti 1 �-= va.a .'0 — -- +:•: - ' • yam d l y , p r ' +.. " '-" `'ti fr. `� ,. �y.T, • 1 , ' '^44" r- -•: ian . r . I Y' ., - ;3' II `'1 f , A 1 14. fir � . r s 1 . i �-�. 3 -- + N i _ . i I) R i I ;717, f r III � ,� . 4: . _ : : e 1 _ i .. '_-( i t y *� °�\ - . ., q , `• ,,,, 145r r`to , ; ..,,_ 7'A� „ L , '„ �} 7 , �r , i r 3 1 c r! 1 ,#0 • . . s x ' 4 6 +L -1' ; , I � 1 r � : . It I i1, 1 1 ;. �'[, 3 e �'Z. , '.; . . E `er. ' t +, f F / fi r: ; mow i r �.. �`_ , _ .� 1 t •: . ` � ). •:.'.'' -- .r] - ' :� 7'..:=- ► .;Y: °' ^I: T,1 :1 ! �, _ -, .,t }_ _ / : r : j 1. r ,..6 4: x . \ . ." „L M -- . •� : 1Y S • F' a. ° , .. . r - � • �� r�r� 9 0.!, . •fi „ , 1 d:' ti � iti _ - . I, . v,.. / :4 • 1 N.1 . ,` J i. . ''12 - a i -- r t' (..,..../,„,:t, a =°c • tr _ ' ' ; , •\� r . . ` 4 .•. 1� ` - I .' r / r r t I , ;J � 'f ` it: ' r ...7 jj r • �• •��`.:;`� 2 � i r ' t y3i ; f !, f ‘,..,c':44'... � A 1 r t : •. • I. . . •, 1 : _ ' . �� .--. .- . - ii i:..','r /`:_j 4. • f � j � �• • 1 `` ;I: ' �. • � ii 1 • .I ¼ o a l� -� : 114; ' ,I, 1 f--:,°":7,. k : z.� . ' ° . , . 7. 1 .. • ha .,. , , .,• •,!• r• . ' f •� . . „ p �'. i ., O tt .tom i •4. � : 2 ....r... 1 . . �' - 1.51• �� o ,; s ti-•i 4; - ;t.,,y,1,. *.`it 6_ L . • ` ._ '1% _^ - - - � _ „' _ f+i • 0 , ` 1\ r i d ' :{' , .4, O ' ' . t . • ▪ 1 1 � 1 �. ;' ' ,,,e,„,4::,:-\-- .''' 1 , "`s 4.;r �(': ~ �> / J x .. u' ti' r J j I 'P7 f :1.1•1 \ .7�� 1 '. 1 v5 iTi .ice / .� ' :,r 3 '.` , . I , ' '' r 4...' ` ma c 1 � ' � S a ' � •J�. , ; SS `�.: . �� 6; • , - � . -r... '�' ., Se .;',1;:' \ �F� ♦ f' „!.,:-",',4:'' 7 (.1 .4.;\ So b t ��. ,' i u' . \i '-: ter• , _ . l I l 1 f , •i; �I : ,I, };'; S •, ; • _f ' y \ �� 4 - ' .N l � ! • - 4 i ' ! 4/11'.....• te •T \ � , i.r • - I a F..-. ,. ti n = i a j . r 1 � �� r � iS % 1�t _ � • t bi' ' S 39 i� ` .I ::'.. L P - r :- - i 1 . � ,u' + '`s ' p ° •�\ � � � �' ? �.'r.:,�n, -, ..� i. .�� (../(/e/1.-.7.:::.:1..re ', V Via•. ;F..: � 4 I � � , i 1, , 12. ,f w ' .t - ,4 4 s . N ' 40 . . - a', l i 1 r.• , ., %ti ,y „ ' • ` `r• : •" I ' \ � C', - - 7 1 i I t i ` • ; • ; , ▪ of = L �, . , 1,1 L. � , d �` -� I • 3 - •{ a .;4 ; 77i. y � y ■ ; f ■ f 1(. 4 1 C1 1 ° • • ` r f l , ' ' 4+I : , _ - � '( ` ,' ' t - u 1 � ' J '♦: 1 . 4 46" _ :. 4,;!, • v e n •' , :.,.. : .z:...� S 4( * �5;7i ; r • I — .[.. . , �_ . ` l _ • : ti ' 'Y. ,t.. .V.,',.4::: � �., ,�+. '-'7•.: r ., • _' ••' ; i, , i , � . • „• �vm� 1 pI �^ -'•'\ ;. I .\ f a - se-- -. ` ` J . e C.' ;�/ �. , `M� '� 4 `�- 5_ "4 -` e I "t.,. ‘k ki i A` ' .1...... :4 11:' 76, 1;;:;' . 2.:., Ftl 7' t.•l ' - r,coit =" Y=9 - t o.., r • G l —". RA I • .— _•14- .�' ' • ': ,�3 ''''''.."8"---•-----,... -._:. t I 1 1 Figure 1 —Site Location • 1 p .. I• M NM ! NM M — — — NM ! OW M NE MO — MI 4* P4 ' H ' InV Mlle Ernst ' • '4 ' t/x, °; , ;. t , ; ;: Y.:. is '1;'...7.4; F.;h:•. -.• ,....;,:.:.;'!..;:t.,-;./.:4.-e,,,;.:.:, . . - ., ..i.. ,% .• t: - d :! :e: . -- • - ' - - '' - •:..'�.: -• . n , .�,: 4...a..•; : • ,t. :Za 1 - •'` • r.1.% ..../.*: ' •^ +n . . • ; ; `f • i -.,.:5•:: S } ,. a 1 r(1 J• 1 • ��j/ 7.. .07S r' , a r.. f' ; - I - ' — — — -- 3 -- -- -- p H ......,::;:k:.r � j .,!,.ti:t. ,., - - . i , ...a b y :,.. � .. I .-1;1) '.''t %� ..�. :._. -.t. ++•:•..�e.. �.... "y';^Y -' �. ;:•• -�i � i- • i o �. G �- w� �i! i _,,.G r a: • �, 1,-,, J '� /j �r 0 I al El :.:.:,...., • / , . ,-, / . _,..... __ __ .... MOW 101r. a .A)-; i . , , • /j ai lJ -_ I %V - ! t �. l EIVEM.Digtag ell� �� 1 a i . ._1_1 , , L i E 1 R • 14 , ..i . ;..; fe , , • F, 11 r 0 � r_ ` ran ; - °�•�' - 1 ! s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 APPENDIX B 1 1 1 1 1 1 5 I Pacific Crossroads CC 12 7/13/2007 Cedar Hills Development LLC I Page 1 of 1 1 ent Pavem Desi n Detail Re ort 1 g p A SW -1 Thickness Design Software version 1.0 Asphalt Institute 1 4 ' 3— I C 0 Asphalt Concrete N 2—, I V , 1 t - .. .1 1 r 0 1 Layers 1 • User: IIHP Owner Date: 117/11/2007 I Time: 1107:32 I Project Information Project Name: 'Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Description: 11Parking lot 1 Pavement Use: 11Parking Lot, driveway, service station Problem Type: 11New Pavement Design Design Input Summary I Traffic Class: II Materials I Subgrade: I'Medium Subgrade Soils Design Results HMA Thickness (in) 114 1 . 1 1 1 file: / /C:\Program Files\Asphalt Institute SW -1 \Thickness Suite\Pacific Crossroads Corpora... 7/11/2007 1 TP -1 1 m Surface Elevation: 230 1 � 5 c o �� Q .�' ` 'C .ca �p � ° 2 July 2007 Oeq Q.m E` .p •4 1,1 ` * , eoe *a te 1 1 0 Soil o _ $ �� Light brown, hard, fine grained dry clayey SILT 1 _ 2 (,� 1 LD g- �- 1 — g - LL= 24,PI =9 17.9 4 Light brown, stiff, fine grained damp clayey SILT 1 I D.' - 18.9 i_ 1 j 1 LL - r 1 E _ t —10 30 - 1 _ Test pit completed at depth of 10 1 t — 12 1 6 _ 1 ; —14 Log of Test Pit 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 1 Rapid Soil Solutions Plate Cedar Hills Development, LLC 1 1 1 TP -2 1 Surface Elevation: 230 g Jc o t\ ti Qec �4�'��10`0 2 July 2007 IP o � Q Q` 0 �� o`1. Qo e fr 5a 4 , � 4. —0 1 ° < , Top Soil - V Light brown, hard, fine grained damp clayey SILT 1_ i- - - . 1 -4 L L= 30,PI =6 23.1 3.5 Light brown, stiff, fine grained damp clayey SILT 11: a l — 6 24.8 13_ y_ 1 8 -8 9 . ' E - u - 10 — 28.4 V 1 Test pit completed at depth of 10 I y- O 1 t 12 — V _ O I � 14 - 1 Log of Test Pit 1 Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Rapid Soil Solutions Cedar Hills Development, LLC Plate 1 1 1 TP -3 1 1 a Surface Elevation: 230 r a �� c0 \� � Q\ *C .ca 2 July 2007 k p mQ q-e 4 ° ` Q � ' ° c o" st % 1 p. —0 Top Soil c_ :.' e � Light brown, hard, fine grained damp clayey SILT c. g I _ i 1 L 0 1 . _4 LL= 30,P1 =12 27.5 4 4 - Light brown, stiff, fine grained damp clayey SILT 1 i t_ 1 3 � -6 27.7 t. m- 1 9 l3 o �- 1 Pt — 10 29.5 1 _ Test pit completed at depth of 10 a 1 S 1 - ° ki ' t - U t. ° d - 1 N _ ' — Log of Test Pit Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center Rapid Soil Solutions Cedar Hills Development, LLC Plate i TP -4 I Surface Elevation: 230 2 July 2007 Q 4' ..,f, ti�J G �� e i ti II 0 ii Top Soil O E, ' • • Light brown, hard, fine grained damp clayey SILT • I i % a C ' i I o / 0 I d 21 4 LL= 26,P1 =8 17.2 5 / Light brown, stiff, fine grained damp clayey SILT 1 1L L 0 a 6 24.3 1t , 0 / i 6 I: ' / U I N u 10 26.6 Test pit completed at depth of 10 1 i ar I; i � I ' ; i - 12 ' l'i� , R V., I1 4 - - 1 ' Log of Test Pit Pacific Crossroads Corporate Center 1 Rapid Soil Solutions ! Cedar Hills Development, LLC Plate 1 . 1 • IIIIII -- MI MI • 1.11 N 111111 OM In MOM . SPH ALT 7409 SW Tech Center Dr, #145 N 6 RAPID SOIL SOULTIONS, 3915 SW PLUM, PORTLAND, OR 97219 Tigard, OR 97223 ons phn: 503. 443 -3799 Testing. Lre. fax: 503- 620 -2748 CLIENT: RAPID SOIL SOLUTIONS PAGE: 01#t PROJECT: Pacific Crossroad Corporate Center JOB NO: 07 -1358 LOCATION: Pfaffel St WORK ORDER NO: SAMPLE SOURCE: SEE BELOW DATE ASSIGNED: 7/4/07 MECHANICAL SIEVE ANALYSIS Silt or SAND GRAVEL COBBLES Fine Medium Coarse Fine Coarse I Location & Depth 1 USCS 1 1.1. 1 P1 #200 01001 #50 1 #40 030 1 018 1 #10 08 1 #4 11114" 1318"1 112" 1 314" 1" 11 114" 11 1/2"1 2" 1 3" 8" Lab # PERCENT PASSING BY WEIGHT TP 1@4' 24 9 - - - 3321 TP2(i 4' 30 6 3321 TP3 ©4' 30 12 3321 TP4 ©4' 26 8 3321 MOISTURE CONTENT MOISTURE CONTENT DEPTH (%) REVIEWED BY ' . 1 I 7409 SW Tech Center Dr. Ste. 145 ( Tigard, OR 97223 Ph:503- 443.3799 Fax: 503 -620 -2748 1 tl Rapid Soil Solutions 3915 SW Plum I Portland OR 97219 • PROJECT: Pacific Crossroad Corporate Center JOB NO: • 07 -1358 I LOCATION: MATERIAL: Pfaffel St WORK ORDER NO: Brown Silt LAB NO: SEE BELOW SAMPLE SOURCE: Site DATE SAMPLED: 7/4/07 I MOISTURE CONTENT OF SOIL (ASTM 02216) 1 LAB # BORING DEPTH WET WT. DRY WT. MOISTURE • (gram) (gram) CONTENT I 3321 TP1 4' 522.1 442.9 17.9% 3321 TP1 8' 607.4 510.7 18.9% I 3321 TP1 10' 565.5 434.7 30.1% 3321 TP2 4' 512.6 416.5 23.1% 3321 TP2 6' 617.9 495.1 24.8% 3321 TP2 10' 529.2 412.1 28.4% I 3321 TP3 4' 448.5 351.8 27.5% 3321 TP3 6' 607.8 476.1 27.7% 3321 TP3 10' 768.8 593.5 29.5% 3321 TP4 4' 304.2 259.8 17.2% I 3321 TP4 6' 618.7 496.1 24.3% 3321 TP4 10' 551.5 435.5 26.6% 1 1 1 1 REVIEWED BY 61/ 1 , . . . . 1 7409 SW Tech Center Dr. Ste. 145 Tigard, OR 97223 . c..... Rapid Soil Solutions Ph: 503-443-3799 Fax: 503-620-2748 3915 SW Plum ,.., 116100.1AC Att Mia Sexton Portland OR. 97219 P ECT: Pacific Crossroad Corporate Center JOB NO: 07-1358 I LOCATION: Pfaffel St WORK ORDER NO: MATERIAL Brown Silt LAB NO: 3321 w SAMPLE SOURCE: Site DATE SAMPLED: 07/04/07 I RESISTANCE R-VALUE AND EXPANSION PRESSURE OF COMPACTED SOILS (ASTM 02844) ' 1 SPECIMEN L D. A B C I Moisture Content 17.8% 15.6% 14.8% Compaction Pressure (psi) 350 350 350 Specimen Height (inches) 2.58 2.57 2.52 I . . Dry Density (pd) 103.5 107.4 110.7 . Hodz. Pres. @ 1000lbs (psi) 48.0 23.0 28.0 Horiz. Pres. @ 2000Ibs (psi) 119.0 68.0 71.0 Displacement 5.74 6.08 3.33 1 Expansion Pressure (psi) 5.1 3.0 1.0 ._ ., Exudation Pressure (psi) 259 477 656 R Value 14 37 48 1 100 - . I 90 _ . 1 80 - • I 70 60 1 ea 1 1 1 . = 6 % 50 > i cc - 1 ............:,...--________,- . . • 40 <-..4 k...,.... ,..,,,,, 30 i 111 20 10 I ! I , 800 750 700 650 600 550 500 450 400 350 300 250 200 150 100 50 0 1 Exudation Pressure (psi) R Value at 300 PSI = 19 I ,,.••••••/ . . / REVIEWED BY ' I 1 1 • I 7409 SW Tech Center Dr. Ste. 145 Rapid Soil Solutions Tigard, OR 97223 p Ph: 503-443-3799 Far. 503-620-2748 (sanr 39 15 SW Plum Att Mia ' r M Portland OR 97218 P ROJECT: Pacific Crossroad Corporate Center JOB NO: 07 -1358 LOCATION: Maffei St WORK ORDER NO: • MATERIAL: Brown Silt LAB NO: 3321 SAMPLE SOURCE: Site SAMPLE DATE 7/4/2007 I LABORATORY COMPACTION CHARACTERISTICS OF SOILS USING STANDARD EFFORTS (12,400f 4b- Wcu.f) (ASTMD698A) II English Metric CURVE: 3321 • - kg/ cu.m.) Maximum dry density: 102.4 1641 Optimum moisture ( %): 17.5 17.5 1 105 I I 104 i 103 102 _ 10i - r -- Illk. .D __ llk II c 100 - ll Z • 99 - -- I . • 98 97 r i I 96 95 ! , 1 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 Moisture (%) I NOTES: - The zero air void curve represents a specific gravity of 2.65 (assumed). • Ns is a summarized report of the referenced procedures and does not include all reporting requirements. Additional data can be provided at clients request 1 • 1 Reviewed by (Ld 6j • 1 7= , 69e tek_)&-CCrZ3 . , _1 ©ACDR SDR2007-00005 1 S136CD— 401/500/1002 4'7e-il /D St-) . _ SW Plettle Street ______O__________ ___ . \ 1111111111111 ''' 4 01111raireigritETERMINIMMKOMISIniniaggilliNEINEWErtiggialliaTialifik 4 II /1 o - • :. (,), Building A 0.!-; F :'':1 I fi i ' Z r-i Propoeed Bulking :cit, '66 5,041 sk 5:e" 0 1 ." o Cr) . 5,04.4 SF roposed Bu , ■ If\hhia , 11 • ° 0 [IN - / \ ----,5 ---' / -------,---- _— - 11 ‘_, 1 j I .; ,•■ 1g C - '1 : - ' 4 • - - - - ' , . IltiallCil.teAl ' - l'fi s - s ■ :___FAIIMMIIIIM1 • \ \ iiimulowingsmengrig ' • I • Il " v 0 ••••• -, ■•, , ts ousi , BM ' ILIMillaillill" lit _in 11 111 A „,. .,,,, ,.., t ..... , 1 ...,,,,,,_...;,..,__,,,•_._:: i 1 , Proposed Bulking& i' - ma V j ': -• 5 99F F I: '' 'N Olin 1 . I'-' . I': • ;- -' ._. . ___ - 4 ,:, - - ".-; '' ' c.:._,' - '''' • El IlliffilliNlifillinilliillig„ ' - F.- -:. ' ' - inn ,,, ...t,„-- -;-- ir 4 .- - %.•,- dill I I Pacific Crossroads Corp Center New Addresses Bld A — 8020 SW Pfaffle Street Bld B — 7910 SW Pfaffle Street Bld C — 8050 SW Pfaffle Street . Retire I ... BETHANY STEWART 8000 SW Pfaffle Street . . ....-.. CITY OF TIGARD ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 7920 SW Pfaffle Street .... .1"; ..,... ., , ____; ; 13125 S W HALL BLVD. , 6 ] TIGARD, OREGON 97223 VOICE (503) 639-0171 i ,•.,,,,' I1..._....,I2 , ...:-. 1 "'Ll FAX (503) 624-0752